WO2019137406A1 - 一种传输方法和网络设备 - Google Patents

一种传输方法和网络设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019137406A1
WO2019137406A1 PCT/CN2019/071060 CN2019071060W WO2019137406A1 WO 2019137406 A1 WO2019137406 A1 WO 2019137406A1 CN 2019071060 W CN2019071060 W CN 2019071060W WO 2019137406 A1 WO2019137406 A1 WO 2019137406A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
network node
message
system information
information
terminal device
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/071060
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
石小丽
罗海燕
戴明增
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN201810296172.6A external-priority patent/CN110035472A/zh
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2019137406A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019137406A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communications and, more particularly, to a transmission method and network device.
  • New access technologies such as 5G (New Radio, NR) technology
  • 5G New Radio, NR
  • NR New Radio, NR
  • SI System Information Block
  • the terminal device checks whether the required System Information Block (SIB) has been broadcast by checking the received scheduling information.
  • SIB System Information Block
  • the terminal device may request the base station to acquire the SI.
  • the base station may be configured by a Centralized Unit (CU) and a Distributed Unit (DU), that is, splitting the functions of the base stations in the original access network, and deploying part of the functions of the base station in One CU deploys the remaining functions in multiple DUs, and multiple DUs share one CU, which can save costs and facilitate network expansion.
  • CU Centralized Unit
  • DU Distributed Unit
  • the DU in the NR CU-DU architecture can indicate the effective area identifier (area ID) of the system information to the terminal device in the broadcast system information, and when the terminal device moves to the new valid area, the new valid area identifier is read. If the effective area identifier does not change, there is no need to re-read the system information. How to indicate the effective area of system information to the terminal device has become an urgent problem to be solved.
  • the present application provides a transmission method and a network device.
  • the second network node determines an effective area of system information, which helps solve the problem of indicating an effective area of system information to a terminal device.
  • a transmission method comprising: receiving, by a first network node, first indication information from a second network node, the first indication information being used to indicate each system information in the at least one system information An effective area; the first network node sends the at least one system information and the first indication information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device learns the effective area to which the at least one system information is applied.
  • the effective area of the at least one system information is a cell granularity or a base station granularity.
  • the transmission method of the embodiment of the present application determines the effective area of the system information by using the second network node, which helps solve the problem of indicating the effective area of the system information to the terminal device.
  • the method further includes: the first network node receiving first configuration information from the second network node, where the first configuration information includes at least one a system information block, scheduling information of the at least one system information block, a mapping relationship between the at least one system information and the at least one system information block, and at least one of a scheduling period of each system information in the at least one system information.
  • the first indication information and the first configuration information may be respectively indicated by the second network node to the first network node in two cells, or may be in the same cell by the same The second network node indicates to the first network node.
  • the transmission method of the embodiment of the present application by receiving the configuration information of the second network node system information by the first network node, helps the first network node to determine the configuration information of the at least one system information, thereby broadcasting the system information to the terminal device. .
  • the method further includes: the first network node determining second configuration information, where the second configuration information is used by the first network node to send the at least one Used by the system information, the second configuration information includes a window length of each system information in the at least one system information, scheduling information of the at least one system information block, a mapping relationship between the at least one system information, and the at least one system information block, At least one of a scheduling period of each system information in at least one system information.
  • the scheduling information of the at least one system information block includes a scheduling period of each system information block in the at least one system information block, where the at least one system information block is At least one of a warning area list of each system information block and a broadcast number of each system information block in the at least one system information.
  • the method further includes: the first network node receiving a Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) indication information from the second network node, and
  • the CSG indication information is used to indicate that the cell in which the terminal device is located is a CSG cell, or the CSG indication information is used to indicate that the cell in which the terminal device is located is not a CSG cell.
  • CSG Closed Subscriber Group
  • the transmission method of the embodiment of the present application determines the CSG indication information by using the second network node, and helps the terminal device determine whether the cell where the terminal device is located is a CSG cell.
  • the method when at least part of the system information of the at least one system information is updated, the method further includes: the first network node receiving second indication information from the second network node, the second The indication information is used to indicate at least one of the at least part of the system information, the system information block in the at least part of the system information, and the effective area of the at least part of the system information.
  • the first indication information when the effective area indicates the area level, includes the area identifier area ID.
  • the first indication information when the effective area indicates the area level and the cell level, includes an area ID and a bitmap information bitmap.
  • the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function; and/or
  • the second network node includes at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • the protocol stack architecture of the first network node is at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function.
  • the protocol stack architecture of the second network node is at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • the first network node is a DU
  • the second network node is a CU
  • the transmission method of the embodiment of the present application is applicable to the NR CU-DU architecture, and is also applicable to other technical fields, such as a scenario similar to Long Term Evolution (LTE) and other standards cooperation.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • a transmission method comprising: a second network node determining an effective area of each system information in the at least one system information; the second network node transmitting first indication information to the first network node, The first indication information is used to indicate an effective area of each system information in the at least one system information.
  • the method further includes: the second network node sending, to the first network node, first configuration information, where the first configuration information includes at least one system information Block, at least one of scheduling information of the at least one system information block, a mapping relationship between the at least one system information and the at least one system information block, and a scheduling period of each system information in the at least one system information.
  • the scheduling information of the at least one system information block includes a scheduling period of each system information block in the at least one system information block, where the at least one system information block is At least one of a warning area list of each system information block and a broadcast number of each system information block in the at least one system information.
  • the method further includes: determining, by the second network node, CSG indication information and CSG identification information, where the CSG indication information is used to indicate a cell in which the terminal device is located It is a CSG cell, or the CSG indication information is used to indicate that the cell in which the terminal device is located is not a CSG cell; and the second network node sends the CSG indication information and the CSG identification information to the first network node.
  • the method when at least part of the system information of the at least one system information is updated, the method further includes: the second network node sending, to the first network node, second indication information, the second indication information And at least one of indicating an effective area of the at least part of the system information, the system information block in the at least part of the system information, and the at least part of the system information.
  • the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function; and/or
  • the second network node includes at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • the protocol stack architecture of the first network node is at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function.
  • the protocol stack architecture of the second network node is at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • a transmission method comprising: receiving, by a terminal device, at least one system information and first indication information from a first network node, the first indication information being used to indicate each of the at least one system information An effective area of the system information; the terminal device determines, according to the first indication information, an effective area to which the at least one system information is applied.
  • the method further includes: receiving, by the terminal device, closed user group CSG indication information and CSG identification information, the CSG indication information, from the first network node
  • the CSG indication information is used to indicate that the cell in which the terminal device is located is not a CSG cell.
  • the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function.
  • the protocol stack architecture of the first network node is at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function.
  • the protocol stack architecture of the second network node is at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • a fourth aspect a transmission method, comprising: determining, by a first network node, that a terminal device uses a first message requesting system information or a system information block, where the first message is a random access first message or a random access third message
  • the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function; the first network node sends third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information And the system information or the system information block is used to indicate that the terminal device uses the first message; wherein the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function.
  • the protocol stack architecture of the first network node is at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function.
  • the transmission method of the embodiment of the present application determines that the terminal device requests the system information or the system information block by using the first message by the first network node, and helps the terminal device to explicitly request the mode when requesting the system information or the system information block.
  • the first message is a random access first message
  • the third indication information is further used to indicate at least one system information and a random access preamble sequence Mapping relations.
  • the first message is a random access third message
  • the method further includes: the first network node receiving the system from the second network node At least one of information request response information and conflict resolution identification information.
  • the first message is a random access third message
  • the method further includes: the first network node receiving a bitmap from the second network node Instructing information, the bitmap indication information is used to indicate system information or a system information block sent to the terminal device; the first network node sends a MAC CE to the terminal device, where the MAC CE includes the bitmap indication information; or, the first network The node forwards the bitmap indication sent by the second network node to the terminal device, where the bitmap indicates system information or a system information block for indicating to the terminal device.
  • the first network node indicates the mapping relationship between the system information and the random access preamble sequence to the terminal device, which is helpful for solving the explicit request mode when the terminal device requests the system information or the system information block.
  • a fifth aspect provides a transmission method, where the method includes: determining, by the second network node, that the terminal device uses the first message requesting system information or a system information block, where the first message is a random access first message or a random access
  • the third network node sends the third indication information to the first network node, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the first network node sends the fourth indication information to the terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate
  • the terminal device requests the system information or the system information block by using the first message; wherein the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function; and/or
  • the second network node includes at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • the protocol stack architecture of the first network node is at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function.
  • the protocol stack architecture of the second network node is at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • the transmission method of the embodiment of the present application determines that the terminal device uses the first message request system information or the system information block by using the second network node, which is helpful for solving the explicit request mode when the terminal device requests the system information or the system information block.
  • the first message is a random access first message
  • the third indication information is further used to indicate at least one system information and a random access preamble sequence Mapping relations.
  • the mapping relationship between the system information and the random access preamble sequence is indicated by the second network node to the terminal device, which is helpful for solving the explicit request mode when the terminal device requests the system information or the system information block.
  • the first message is a random access first message
  • the fourth indication information is further used to indicate at least one system information and a random access preamble sequence Mapping relations.
  • the first network node indicates the mapping relationship between the system information and the random access preamble sequence to the terminal device, which is helpful for solving the explicit request mode when the terminal device requests the system information or the system information block.
  • the first message is a random access third message, where the third indication information is further used by the first network node to indicate to the terminal device to use the The third message request system information is randomly accessed, or the third indication information is used by the first network node to indicate to the terminal device that the system information block is requested by using the random access third message.
  • the first message is a random access third message
  • the method further includes: the second network node sending a system information request to the first network node
  • the system information request response includes at least one of system information request response information and conflict resolution identification information.
  • the first message is a random access third message
  • the method further includes: the second network node indicating information to the bitmap of the first network node
  • the bitmap indication information is used to indicate the system information that is sent to the terminal device; or the second network node sends the bitmap indication information to the terminal device by using the first network node, where the bitmap indication information is used to indicate that the information is sent to the terminal device.
  • System information or system information block is used to indicate that the information is sent to the terminal device.
  • the second network node indicates to the terminal device that the terminal device indicates that the system information or the system information block is requested by using the random access third message, which is helpful for solving the terminal device requesting system information or system information.
  • the block is explicitly requested.
  • a transmission method comprising: the first network node transmitting resource state information to the second network node, where the resource state information includes at least one of a physical resource block, a hardware load, and an almost blank subframe
  • the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function; and/or the second network node includes a radio resource control protocol layer and service data. At least one of a layering layer and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • the protocol stack architecture of the first network node is at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function.
  • the protocol stack architecture of the second network node is at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • the resource status information is sent to the second network node by using the first network node, which helps solve the problem that the resource status of the network device requests each other.
  • the method before the first network node sends the resource state information to the second network node, the method further includes: the first network node receiving the resource sent by the second network node A status request message, the resource status request message is used to request the resource status information.
  • the method further includes: the first network node receiving the resource state information of the third network node from the second network node.
  • a transmission method comprising: receiving, by a second network node, first resource status information from a first network node, the first resource status information including a physical resource block, a hardware load, and an almost blank At least one of the subframes; the second network node sends the second resource state information to the third network node, where the second resource state information includes a physical resource block, a hardware load, an almost blank subframe, a transport network layer load, and an available capacity And at least one of a reference signal received power measurement report and a channel state information report.
  • the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function; and/or the second network node includes a radio resource control protocol layer and service data adaptation. At least one of a layer and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • the protocol stack architecture of the first network node is at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function.
  • the protocol stack architecture of the second network node is at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • the resource status information is sent to the third network node by using the second network node, which helps solve the problem that the resource status of the network device requests each other.
  • the method before the second network node receives the first resource state information from the first network node, the method further includes: the second network node receiving the a second resource status request information sent by the third network node, where the second resource request information is used to request the second resource status information; the second network node sends the first resource status request information to the first network node, where the first a resource status request message for requesting the first resource status information; the second network node receiving a measurement result from the first network node, the measurement result including at least one of a physical resource block, a hardware load, and an almost blank subframe Kind.
  • the method further includes: the second network node receiving the second resource state information sent by the third network node; The first network node sends the first resource status information.
  • a transmission method includes: the terminal device generates a second message, where the second message includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device requests system information or a system The information block, or the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device requests to establish an RRC connection; or the terminal device generates a second message, where the second message is carried on the first logical channel or the second logical channel, the first logic The channel is used to carry a message requesting system information or a system information block, the second logical channel is used to carry a message requesting an RRC connection; or the terminal device generates a second message, the second message uses a first logical channel identifier or a second a logical channel identifier, the first logical channel identifier is used to identify a message requesting system information, the second logical channel identifier is used to identify a message requesting an RRC connection; and the terminal device sends the second message to the first network node, the first A network node includes
  • the fourth indication information is included in a message header of the fourth message, where the message header may be a MAC layer header or an RLC layer header; or the fourth The indication information is message type information;
  • a ninth aspect a transmission method is provided, the method includes: receiving, by a first network node, a second message from a terminal device, where the second message includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the terminal The device requests the system information or the system information block, or the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device requests to establish an RRC connection, where the first network node includes a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function.
  • At least one of the first network nodes; or the first network node receives a second message on the first logical channel or the second logical channel, where the message carried on the first logical channel is used to request system information or a system information block, the second And the first network node receives the second message from the terminal device, where the second message uses the first logical channel identifier, or the second message uses a second logical channel identifier; the first network node sends a third message to the second network node, where the third message includes the second A first container, the first container information indicating the system information of the terminal device needs to request the second network node comprises radio resource control protocol layer, at least one adaptation layer service data and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • a transmission method includes: receiving, by a second network node, a third message from a first network node, where the third message is used to request to establish an RRC connection, or And requesting system information or a system information block, the third message is determined according to the information of the first container in the third message; the second network node determines that the second message does not include the second container, the second The container is an RRC container of the first network node to the second network node; the second network node sends a reject indication information to the terminal device by using the first network node, where the reject indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device is denied to establish an RRC connection. .
  • the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function; and/or the second network node includes a radio resource control protocol. At least one of a layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • the method further includes: the second network node receiving a third message from the first network node, the third message being used to request system information or a system information block, the third message is Determining, according to the information of the first container in the third message, the second network node determining that the information of the first container indicates that the terminal device needs to request the system information or the system information block; the second network node passes the first The network node sends system information request response information or bitmap indication information to the terminal device, where the bitmap indication information is used to indicate system information or system information blocks sent to the terminal device.
  • the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function; and/or the second network node includes a radio resource control protocol. At least one of a layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • the information of the first container is a message type message type.
  • a network device for performing the method of the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect.
  • the network device comprises means for performing the method of any of the above-described first or first possible implementations of the first aspect.
  • a network device for performing the method of any of the second aspect or any of the possible implementations of the second aspect.
  • the network device comprises means for performing the method of any of the possible implementations of the second aspect or the second aspect described above.
  • a terminal device for performing the method of any of the third aspect or any of the possible implementations of the third aspect.
  • the terminal device comprises means for performing the method of any of the possible implementations of the third aspect or the third aspect described above.
  • a network device for performing the method of any of the possible implementations of the fourth aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • the network device comprises means for performing the method of any of the possible implementations of the fourth aspect or the fourth aspect described above.
  • a network device for performing the method in any of the possible implementations of the fifth aspect or the fifth aspect.
  • the network device comprises means for performing the method of any of the possible implementations of the fifth aspect or the fifth aspect described above.
  • a network device for performing the method of any of the sixth or sixth aspect of the possible implementation.
  • the network device comprises means for performing the method of any of the possible implementations of the sixth or sixth aspect above.
  • a network device for performing the method of any of the seventh or seventh aspects of the possible implementation.
  • the network device comprises means for performing the method of any of the possible implementations of the seventh aspect or the seventh aspect described above.
  • a terminal device for performing the method in any of the possible implementations of the eighth aspect or the eighth aspect.
  • the terminal device comprises means for performing the method of any of the possible implementations of the eighth aspect or the eighth aspect above.
  • a network device for performing the method of any of the ninth or ninth aspects of the possible implementation.
  • the network device comprises means for performing the method of any of the possible implementations of the ninth aspect or the ninth aspect.
  • a network device for performing the method of any of the tenth or tenth aspects of the possible implementation.
  • the network device comprises means for performing the method of any of the possible implementations of the tenth or tenth aspect above.
  • a network device comprising a memory, a transceiver, and at least one processor, the memory, the transceiver, and the at least one processor being interconnected by a line, the transceiver.
  • the instructions are those that perform the processing operations performed at the first network node in the method of any of the possible implementations of the first aspect and the first aspect.
  • a network device comprising a memory, a transceiver, and at least one processor, the memory, the transceiver, and the at least one processor being interconnected by a line, the transceiver And the method of any one of the possible implementations of the second aspect and the second aspect, wherein the at least one processor invokes an operation of the message stored in the second network node; The instructions perform the processing operations performed at the second network node in the method of any of the possible implementations of the second aspect and the second aspect.
  • a terminal device comprising a memory, a transceiver, and at least one processor, the memory, the transceiver, and the at least one processor being interconnected by a line, the transceiver And the method of any one of the possible implementations of the third aspect and the third aspect, wherein the at least one processor invokes the instruction stored in the memory And performing the processing operation performed by the terminal device in the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the third aspect and the third aspect.
  • a network device comprising a memory, a transceiver, and at least one processor, the memory, the transceiver, and the at least one processor being interconnected by a line, the transceiver And the method of any one of the possible implementations of the fourth aspect and the fourth aspect, the operation of transmitting and receiving at the first network node; the at least one processor calling the location stored in the memory The instruction, the processing operation performed by the first network node in the method in any one of the possible implementations of the fourth aspect and the fourth aspect.
  • a network device comprising a memory, a transceiver, and at least one processor, the memory, the transceiver, and the at least one processor being interconnected by a line, the transceiver And the method of any one of the possible implementations of the fifth aspect and the fifth aspect, wherein the at least one processor invokes an operation of the message stored in the second network node; The instruction, the processing operation performed by the second network node in the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the fifth aspect and the fifth aspect.
  • a network device comprising a memory, a transceiver, and at least one processor, the memory, the transceiver, and the at least one processor being interconnected by a line, the transceiver And the method of any one of the sixth aspect and the sixth aspect, wherein the operation of the message is performed at the first network node; the at least one processor calls the location stored in the memory The processing of the first network node in the method of any one of the possible implementations of the sixth aspect and the sixth aspect.
  • a network device comprising a memory, a transceiver, and at least one processor, the memory, the transceiver, and the at least one processor being interconnected by a line, the transceiver And the method of any one of the seventh aspect and the seventh aspect, wherein the at least one processor invokes an operation of the message stored in the second network node; The instructions perform the processing operations performed at the second network node in the method of any of the possible implementations of the seventh aspect and the seventh aspect.
  • a terminal device comprising a memory, a transceiver, and at least one processor, the memory, the transceiver, and the at least one processor being interconnected by a line, the transceiver And the method of any one of the possible implementations of the eighth aspect and the eighth aspect, wherein the at least one processor invokes the instruction stored in the memory And performing the processing operation performed by the terminal device in the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the eighth aspect and the eighth aspect.
  • a network device comprising a memory, a transceiver, and at least one processor, the memory, the transceiver, and the at least one processor being interconnected by a line, the transceiver And the method of any one of the possible implementations of the ninth aspect and the ninth aspect, the operation of transmitting and receiving at the first network node; the at least one processor calling the location stored in the memory
  • the instructions are the processing operations performed at the first network node in the method of any of the possible implementations of the ninth and ninth aspects.
  • a network device comprising a memory, a transceiver, and at least one processor, the memory, the transceiver, and the at least one processor being interconnected by a line, the transceiver being for And the method of any one of the possible implementations of the tenth aspect and the tenth aspect, wherein the at least one processor invokes the operation stored in the memory
  • the instructions are the processing operations performed at the second network node in the method of any of the possible implementations of the tenth and tenth aspects.
  • a transmission method includes: the control plane node receives a user plane node, and sends a fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate a radio link failure of the first network node; Determining, according to the fifth indication information, whether to switch the first network node, where the protocol stack architecture of the control plane node is at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer. And/or the protocol stack architecture of the first network node is at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function.
  • a transmission method includes: the user plane node sends a fifth indication information to the control plane node, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate a radio link failure of the first network node;
  • the protocol stack architecture of the user plane node is at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer; and/or the protocol stack architecture of the first network node is a radio link layer control. At least one of a protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function.
  • the method further includes: the user plane node receiving the user plane interface message sent by the first network node, where the user plane interface message is used And indicating that the wireless link of the first network node is faulty.
  • a transmission method includes: the first control plane node sends a sixth indication information to the first user plane node, where the sixth indication information is used to trigger the data forwarding address of the first bearer to be allocated.
  • the first control plane node receives the data forwarding address sent by the first user plane node; wherein, the protocol stack architecture of the first control plane node is a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol. At least one of the layers.
  • the method further includes: the data forwarding address sent by the first control plane node to the second user plane node.
  • the method further includes: the first control plane node transmitting the data to the second user plane node by using the second control plane node Forwarding address.
  • a network device for performing the method in any of the possible implementations of the thirty-first aspect or the thirty-first aspect.
  • the network device comprises means for performing the method of any of the possible implementations of the thirty-first aspect or the thirty-first aspect described above.
  • a network device for performing the method of any of the possible aspects of the thirty-second aspect or the thirty-second aspect.
  • the network device comprises means for performing the method of any of the possible implementations of the thirty-second aspect or the thirty-second aspect described above.
  • a network device for performing the method in any of the possible implementations of the thirty-third aspect or the thirty-third aspect.
  • the network device comprises means for performing the method of any of the possible implementations of the thirty-third aspect or the thirty-third aspect described above.
  • a network device comprising a memory, a transceiver, and at least one processor, the memory, the transceiver, and the at least one processor being interconnected by a line, the transceiver And the method of any one of the possible implementations of the thirty-first aspect and the thirty-first aspect, the operation of transmitting and receiving at the control plane node; the at least one processor calling the memory
  • the stored instructions perform the processing operations performed at the control plane node in the method of any of the possible implementations of the thirty-first aspect and the thirty-first aspect.
  • a network device comprising a memory, a transceiver, and at least one processor, the memory, the transceiver, and the at least one processor being interconnected by a line, the transceiver And the method of any one of the possible implementations of the 32nd aspect and the 32nd aspect, wherein the at least one processor invokes the operation of the message;
  • the stored instructions are the processing operations performed at the user plane node in the method of any one of the possible implementations of the 32nd aspect and the 32nd aspect.
  • a network device comprising a memory, a transceiver, and at least one processor, the memory, the transceiver, and the at least one processor being interconnected by a line, the transceiver And the method of any one of the possible implementations of the thirty-third aspect and the thirty-third aspect, wherein the at least one processor invokes the operation of the message at the first control plane node;
  • the instructions stored in the memory perform the processing operations performed by the first control plane node in the method of any one of the possible implementations of the thirty-third aspect and the thirty-third aspect.
  • a chip system for use in a network device, the chip system comprising: at least one processor, at least one memory, and an interface circuit, wherein the interface circuit is responsible for information interaction between the chip system and the outside world,
  • the at least one memory, the interface circuit, and the at least one processor are interconnected by a line, the at least one memory storing instructions; the instructions being executed by the at least one processor to perform the various aspects described above The operation of the first network node or the second network node in the method described.
  • a communication system comprising: a network device, and/or a terminal device; wherein the network device is the network device described in the above aspects.
  • a forty-second aspect a computer program product for use in a network device, the computer program product comprising a series of instructions, when the instructions are executed, to perform the method of the above aspects The operation of the first network node, the second network node, the control plane node, or the user plane node.
  • a computer readable storage medium having instructions stored therein that, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method of the various aspects described above.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a technical solution in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of another application scenario of the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of still another application scenario of the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of still another application scenario of the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of still another application scenario of the technical solution in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is another schematic flowchart of a transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a mapping diagram of SI and SIB.
  • FIG. 9 is still another schematic flowchart of a transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is still another schematic flowchart of a transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is still another schematic flowchart of a transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is still another schematic flowchart of a transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is still another schematic flowchart of a transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a MAC protocol layer of an RRC message.
  • FIG. 15 is still another schematic flowchart of a transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is still another schematic flowchart of a transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is still another schematic flowchart of a transmission method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is another schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 21 is still another schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 22 is still another schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 23 is still another schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 24 is still another schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 25 is another schematic block diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 26 is still another schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 27 is still another schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 28 is still another schematic block diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. Part of the function is separated into a first network node and a second network node.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of another application scenario of the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application.
  • a CU-DU segmentation is introduced, and the DU may correspond to FIG.
  • the first network node in the CU corresponds to the second network node in FIG.
  • first network node and the second network node may be two physical or logical separation modules in an overall network architecture, or may be two logical network elements that are completely independent.
  • the second network node may separate the control plane from the user plane to form a user plane of the second network node and a control plane of the second network node.
  • the CU has a Radio Resource Control (RRC) or a partial RRC control function, and includes all protocol layer functions or partial protocol layer functions of the existing base station; for example, only the RRC function or part of the RRC function, or the RRC function or service is included.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • SDAP Service Data Adaptation Protocol
  • PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol
  • RLC Radio Link layer control protocols
  • MAC Media Access Control
  • the DU has all or part of the protocol layer functions of the existing base station, that is, part of the protocol layer functional units of the RRC/SDAP/PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY, such as a part of the RRC function and protocol layer functions such as PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY. Or include protocol layer functions such as PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY, or include protocol layer functions such as RLC/MAC/PHY or include partial RLC/MAC/PHY functions, or only all or part of PHY functions; The functions of the various protocol layers may vary and are within the scope of this application.
  • different protocol layers may be separately deployed in the first network node and the second network node, and one possible implementation manner is that at least the first protocol layer is deployed in the second network node. And a second protocol layer, at least a third protocol layer and a fourth protocol layer are deployed in the first network node,
  • the first protocol layer may be an RRC layer
  • the second protocol layer may be a PDCP layer
  • the third protocol layer may be a MAC layer
  • the fourth protocol layer may be a PHY layer.
  • first protocol layer the second protocol layer, the third protocol layer, and the fourth protocol layer is merely exemplary, and should not be construed as limiting the application.
  • the first protocol layer and the second protocol layer may also be existing protocols (e.g., LTE protocol) or other protocol layers defined in future protocols, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • new relay nodes also have new technological advances.
  • the relay node is only deployed with layer 2 (for example, including a resource link control (RLC) layer, a MAC layer, etc.)
  • the protocol stack architecture of layer 1 eg, including the PHY layer
  • all protocol stack functions above layer 2 are not deployed, such as all RRC layer functions. Therefore, the data or signaling generated by the host base station needs to be forwarded by the relay node to the terminal device.
  • the first network node in the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the DU in the CU-DU architecture, and may also correspond to the foregoing relay node, where the second network node may correspond to the CU in the CU-DU architecture, or Corresponding to the above-mentioned host base station, or CU and DU corresponding to the above-mentioned host base station, the DU and the UE are transmitted through one relay node or multiple relay nodes, and the last hop relay node of the UE corresponds to the first network node.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of still another application scenario according to the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application is applicable to an NR CU-DU architecture system, and the NR CU-DU system is provided.
  • the interface between the CU and the DU is an F1 interface
  • the interface between the base station 1 (gNB1) and the base station 2 (gNB2) is an Xn interface
  • the interface between the base station and the core network (5GC) is an NG interface.
  • FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 are schematic diagrams showing still another application scenario of the technical solution according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application is applicable to an LTE CU-DU architecture system, and the difference lies in the CU.
  • the V1 interface is similar to the F1 interface.
  • the interface between the base stations (eNBs) is an X2 interface.
  • the CU can be connected to the core network EPC or to the NR core network 5GC.
  • the transport layer protocol of the control plane is the Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP), and the transmitted application layer message is an F1AP (Application Protocol) message.
  • the transport layer protocol of the user plane is the GPRS Tunnelling Protocol-User plane (GTP-U) at the user level.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile Communication
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplex
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  • 5G fifth-generation
  • the network device in the embodiment of the present application may be a device for communicating with the terminal device, for example, may be a base station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS) and a base station controller (Base Station Controller) in the GSM system or CDMA.
  • BTS Base Transceiver Station
  • Base Station Controller Base Station Controller
  • the combination of the BSC may also be a base station (NodeB, NB) and a radio network controller (RNC) in the WCDMA system, or may be an evolved base station (Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB) in the LTE system.
  • BTS Base Transceiver Station
  • Base Station Controller Base Station Controller
  • the combination of the BSC may also be a base station (NodeB, NB) and a radio network controller (RNC) in the WCDMA system, or may be an evolved base station (Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB) in the LTE system.
  • NodeB NodeB
  • RNC
  • the network device may be a relay station, an access point, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device, and an access network device in a future 5G network, such as a next-generation base station, or a future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN). ) Access network equipment in the network, etc.
  • a future 5G network such as a next-generation base station, or a future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN).
  • PLMN public land mobile network
  • the wireless network control node and the base station are separated.
  • the baseband module and the radio frequency module are separated, that is, the radio frequency.
  • the remote data center (Data Center, DC) scenario requires two different networks to interconnect; the large and small station scenarios, the large and small stations are connected to each other; the LTE and Wifi aggregation (LTE-Wifi aggregation, LWA) scenarios;
  • LTE-Wifi aggregation LTE-Wifi aggregation, LWA
  • There are various non-cell scenarios in the 5G system terminal can freely switch between cells, there is no clear boundary between cells), there is a control node and all cells are connected, or under the cell Connected to each transport node; in the CRAN scenario, there is a scenario where the BBU is split; in the CRAN virtualization scenario, a part of the BBU is deployed in a centralized manner, virtualized, and another part of the functions are deployed separately, and there is a possibility of physical separation between the two parts; It is understood that different system/system coexistence scenarios are within the scope of this application.
  • the present application describes various embodiments in connection with a terminal device.
  • the terminal device may also refer to a user equipment (User Equipment, UE), an access terminal, a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, a terminal, a wireless communication device, and a user agent.
  • the access terminal may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), with wireless communication.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a transmission method 100 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first network node in the transmission method 100 may be the first network node in FIG. 1 , and may also be FIG. 2 .
  • the second network node in the transmission method 100 may be the second network node in FIG. 1 and may also be the CU in FIG. 2.
  • the method 100 includes:
  • the second network node determines an effective area of each system information in the at least one system information.
  • the second network node sends first indication information to the first network node, where the first network node receives the first indication information from the second network node, where the first indication information is used to indicate the at least one The effective area of each system information in the system information;
  • the first network node sends the at least one system information and the first indication information to the terminal device, where the terminal device receives the at least one system information and the first indication information from the first network node, to facilitate the The terminal device learns the effective area to which the at least one system information is applied.
  • each system information in the at least one system information may be different from each other, or may be partially the same, or the effective areas of each system information are the same.
  • the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function; and/or
  • the second network node includes at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • the system information can include the main information block (MIB), the system information block 1 (SIB1), and other system messages other SIs (for example, numbers 2 to 22). SIB2-SIB22).
  • the SI can also be classified into a minimum system message MSI and other SIs according to the manner of transmission, wherein the MSI mainly includes the MIB and the SIB1.
  • the terminal device may request the other SIs, and the network device may transmit the requested other SI by means of broadcast or proprietary RRC signaling.
  • the system message can be divided into multiple system message blocks, which SIBs are included in each SI block, which can be specified by the protocol, or can be specifically determined by the network device. If the SI block contains which SIBs are determined by the network device, the network device needs to broadcast to inform the terminal device in the MSI.
  • the second network node first determines an area ID, where the effective area is a valid area corresponding to the system information SI, and the second network node sends the first indication information to the first network node, where the first The indication information is used to indicate a valid area of each system information in the at least one system information, and after the first network node receives the first indication information from the second network node, the at least one system information and the first indication
  • the information is broadcast to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the at least one system information and the first indication information, the terminal device can learn the effective area to which the at least one system information is applied, and when the terminal device moves, the terminal device acquires a new The effective area of the system information, if the effective area does not change, the terminal device does not need to re-read the system information.
  • the first indication information may include an effective area of each system information in the at least one system information, or the first indication information includes an effective area of the system information, or the first indication information includes an effective area of the system information and a bit.
  • Graph information wherein the bitmap information can be replaced with a list of indications (the bitmap information described in this application can be replaced with a list of indications, which will not be described below).
  • the bitmap information is a bitmap indication of 0/1 (for example, 00001101, etc., where 0 indicates that system information is valid in the local cell, and 1 indicates that system information is valid in a cell with the same area ID), and the indication list is a separate
  • the indications are, for example, SIB2:0, SIB3:1, etc., where 0 indicates that the system information is valid in the local cell, and 1 indicates that the system information is valid in the same area with the same area ID.
  • the first indication information includes system information.
  • the effective area may include only the area identifier area ID, or the effective area may also include an area ID and bitmap information, or the effective area may also include an area ID and indication information, where
  • the area ID is an area identifier, which is used to identify an area identifier to which system information can be applied, that is, each cell has an area ID or each area has an area ID list
  • the bitmap information is a bitmap indication of 0/1 (eg, , 00001101, etc., where 0 indicates that the system information is valid in the local cell, 1 indicates that the system information is valid in the same area ID
  • the indication information is a separate indication, such as SIB2:0, SIB3:1, etc. 0 means that the system information is valid in the local cell, and 1 means that the system information is valid in the same area as the area ID.
  • the first indication information may be configured by the Network Operation and Maintenance (OAM) to the second network node or the first network node:
  • OAM Network Operation and Maintenance
  • the OAM configures the first indication information to the second network node
  • the second network node needs to send the first indication information to the first network node
  • the first network node may directly send the information to the terminal device.
  • the area ID of the effective area in the first indication information is directly configurable by the OAM, that is, the OAM is directly configured to the first network node, and the bitmap information of the effective area in the first indication information is the second Determined by the network node.
  • bitmap information of the effective area in the first indication information is directly configurable by the OAM, that is, the OAM is directly configured to the first network node, and the area ID of the effective area in the first indication information is the second Determined by the network node.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate an effective area of each system information in the at least one system information, that is, the first indication information that is sent by the second network node to the first network node is each of the at least one system information.
  • the effective area corresponding to the system information, the first indication information only includes an area ID, such as a cell format as follows:
  • the cell format is not limited to the above table.
  • the area ID may be a value (such as an area ID of 5), or may be a list of IDs, such as (areaID list, 5, 6, 7).
  • the first network node may generate a bitmap information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate an effective area of each system information in the at least one system information, that is, the first indication information that is sent by the second network node to the first network node is each of the at least one system information.
  • the effective area corresponding to the system information, the first indication information includes an area ID and bitmap information, such as a cell format as follows:
  • the cell format is not limited to the above table.
  • the area ID may be a value (such as an area ID of 5), or may be a list of IDs, such as (areaID list, 5, 6, 7).
  • the first network node may also modify the bitmap information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate an effective area of the system information, that is, the first indication information that is sent by the second network node to the first network node is a valid area of the system information, where the first indication information is only Including the area ID, all system information or all the system information blocks corresponding to the area ID are the same, Table 1 and Table 2 show the two first indication information of the cell list, as shown in Table 1 and Table 2.
  • Table 1 list of cells indicating the first indication
  • the cell format is not limited to the above table.
  • the area ID may be a value (such as an area ID of 5), or may be a list of IDs, such as (areaID list, 5, 6, 7).
  • the first network node may generate a bitmap information.
  • the first indication information further indicates an effective area of the system information, that is, the first indication information sent by the second network node to the first network node is an effective area of the system information, all system information or all systems.
  • the area IDs corresponding to the information blocks are the same.
  • Tables 3 and 4 show the cell lists of the two first indication information, as shown in Tables 3 and 4.
  • Table 3 list of further cells of the first indication information
  • Table 4 list of further cells of the first indication information
  • the cell format is not limited to the above table.
  • the area ID may be a value (such as an area ID of 5), or may be a list of IDs, such as (areaID list, 5, 6, 7).
  • the first network node may also modify the bitmap information.
  • the bitmap information is used to indicate an area where system information is applicable, that is, some system information is applicable to the local cell, and some system information is not only applicable to the local cell, but also applicable to other cells.
  • system information is applicable
  • the bitmap indicates SI granularity
  • the bit number of bits is 0/1 of 4 digits.
  • the indication can be 0110, 0 means system information is in this.
  • the cell is valid, and the system information is valid in the cell with the same area ID.
  • the location of the 0110 corresponds to the number of the SI, and may be a protocol definition.
  • the present invention is not limited; if the bitmap indicates the SIB granularity,
  • the bitmap indication may be a string of 22-bit 0/1 indications. If the indication is 0011 though1001, 0 means that the system information is valid in the local cell, and 1 means that the system information is valid in the same area ID, the 22 bits.
  • the location of the SIB corresponds to the number of the SIB, and may also be a protocol definition, which is not limited in this application.
  • the first network node After receiving the system information and the first indication information, the first network node sends the system information and the first indication information to the terminal device. Specifically, the first network node sends the system information, the area ID, and the bit. At least one of the map information is sent to the terminal device.
  • the first indication information is the bitmap and the area ID
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the bitmap and the area ID, if the bitmap value corresponding to the system information to be read is 0, it is considered that the read system information is valid in the local area. After moving to another cell, the system information needs to be re-read; if the bitmap value corresponding to the system information to be read is 1, it is considered that the read system information is valid in the area of the area ID, for example, the area ID is 6.
  • the terminal device is valid. When the terminal device moves to another cell, the terminal device acquires the area ID of the new system information. If the area ID is 6, the terminal device does not need to re-read the system information.
  • the area ID and the bitmap information may be carried in the F1 AP message sent by the CU to the DU, for example, may be carried in the F1 setup response message, or may be carried in the gNB-CU configuration update message sent by the CU to the DU. Or, may be carried in the gNB-DU configuration update acknowledge message of the gNB-DU, or may be carried in other existing messages of the F1 AP, or may be carried in the new F1 AP message. No restrictions are imposed.
  • the area ID may be a cell ID (PCI)/cell ID list (PCI list), or may be an integer of 1/2/3.
  • each cell has an area ID
  • the area ID may be an integer number
  • the protocol stack architecture of the first network node may be at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function
  • the protocol stack architecture of the second network node may be a radio resource.
  • the area ID may be one-to-one corresponding to the cell, that is, the area ID may be a cell ID, a cell list, or an integer of 1/2/3.
  • the area ID may also be in one-to-one correspondence with the base station, that is, the area ID may be a gNB ID, or may be a gNB list, or may be an integer of 1/2/3.
  • Table 5 shows a list of cells of the first indication information, as shown in Table 5.
  • Table 5 List of cells indicating the first indication
  • Group Name represents the group name.
  • the first network node may be the gNB-DU in FIG. 3, or the first network node may be the eNB-DU in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5, and the second network node may be the one in FIG. gNB-CU, or the first network node may be the eNB-CU in FIG. 4 or FIG. 5.
  • the first network node may be the gNB-DU in FIG. 3, and the second network node is the gNB-CU in FIG. 3.
  • the gNB-CU may carry the first indication information through the F1 interface message, and the gNB-DU starts.
  • the F1 interface establishes an F1 setup request message to the gNB-CU, and the first indication information is carried in the F1 setup response message sent by the gNB-CU to the gNB-DU.
  • the first network node may be the gNB-DU in FIG. 3, the second network node is the gNB-CU in FIG. 3, and the gNB-CU may carry the response in the response to the configuration update message of the gNB-DU.
  • the first indication information the gNB-DU starts the gNB-DU update process, sends a gNB-DU configuration update message to the gNB-CU, and the gNB-CU responds to the configuration update message to send the gNB-DU configuration update to the gNB-DU.
  • the first update information is carried in the configuration update acknowledge message.
  • the first network node may be the gNB-DU in FIG. 3, and the second network node is the gNB-CU in FIG. 3.
  • the gNB-CU may carry the first indication in the configuration update message of the gNB-CU.
  • the information, the gNB-CU sends a configuration update message to the gNB-DU, where the configuration update message includes the first indication information.
  • the gNB-DU may broadcast the first indication information to the terminal device in SIB1.
  • the area ID in the present application may be one-to-one corresponding to the cell, that is, the area ID may be a cell ID, or may be a cell list, or may be an integer of 1/2/3, etc. It may be an identifier of another defined identifiable area, which is not limited herein.
  • the transmission method of the embodiment of the present application determines the effective area of the at least one system information by the second network node, and sends the information to the terminal device through the first network node, which helps solve the problem of indicating the effective area of the system information to the terminal device.
  • the transmission method 100 further includes:
  • the second network node configures the closed user group CSG indication information and the CSG identification information, where the CSG indication information is used to indicate that the cell of the first network node is a CSG cell, or the CSG indication information is used to indicate that the cell of the first network node is not CSG cell.
  • the second network node sends the CSG indication information and CSG identification information to the first network node, where the first network node receives CSG indication information and CSG identification information from the second network node.
  • the CSG indication information and the CSG identification information may be configured by the second network node, where the second network node may carry the CSG indication information and the message sent by the second network node to the first network node.
  • the CSG identification information is sent to the first network node, and the first network node may add the CSG indication information and the CSG identification information to the final system information and broadcast the information to the terminal device.
  • the gNB-CU may carry the CSG indication information and the CSG identification information to the gNB-DU in the F1 interface message, where the gNB-DU may add the CSG indication information and the SIB1.
  • the CSG identifies the information and broadcasts it to the terminal device.
  • the CSG cell may be configured by the gNB-DU, and the gNB-DU may carry the CSG identification information in the F1 interface setup request message for the gNB-CU to obtain when the F1 interface of the gNB-CU is triggered. CSG member status. Specifically, the CSG identification information may be displayed in the F1 interface message, or may be carried in the SIB1 to the gNB-CU.
  • the gNB-CU or the gNB-DU may also configure the access mode of the cell. If the cell access mode (the cell access mode, there are three access modes, closed, open, hybrid) The function is to determine the UE access control. If it is determined by the gNB-DU, the DU needs to inform the CU of the cell access mode, and the core network is informed when the CU interacts with the core network, and the core network performs access control. . This scheme is also applicable to systems of LTE CU-DU. Or, if the cell access mode (the cell access mode, the three access modes are closed, open, hybrid, and the role is for the UE access control), if the gNB-CU determines, the CU needs to notify the cell access mode. DU.
  • the gNB-DU has some parameters that need to be sent to the gNB-CU (that is, the parameter is a parameter that can be obtained by the gNB-DU), and is used by the gNB-CU to compile the SIB in the other SIs.
  • the specific parameters include:
  • SIB2 some parameters in SIB2: at least one of ac-barring (Access Class Barring), UE timers and constants, frequency information, multiband information, MBSFN subframe configuration, and the like
  • MCCH configuration for which the gNB-CU/OAM needs to provide the MBSFN area to the gNB-DU.
  • SIB14 Some parameters in SIB14: EAB (Extended Access Barring) parameters.
  • SIB16 Some parameters in SIB16: at least one of GPS time, Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), and the like.
  • SIB18/19 Some parameters in SIB18/19: sidelink communication related resource configuration.
  • gNB-CU/OAM Orthogonal, Administration and Maintenance
  • Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service uses single-cell point-to-multipoint (SC-PTM) transmission control information
  • V2X Vehicle-to-Everything
  • SIB21 V2X (Vehicle-to-Everything) sidelink communication configuration, for which the gNB-CU/OAM needs to provide relevant areas for supporting the sidelink communication to the gNB-DU.
  • the gNB-DU may also have the compiling function of the above several SIBs, that is, after the gNB-CU compiled SIB is sent to the gNB-DU, the gNB-DU may modify some of the parameters, that is, recompile.
  • the transmission method 100 further includes:
  • the second network node determines second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the at least part of the system information, the system information block in the at least part of the system information, and the effective area of the at least part of the system information At least one
  • the second network node sends the second indication information to the first network node, where the first network node receives the second indication information from the second network node.
  • the second network node may send the second indication information to the first network node, where the first network node receives the second indication information. After that, the second indication information is broadcast to the terminal device.
  • the gNB-CU and the gNB-DU can exchange respective updated system information through the F1 interface message, specifically:
  • the gNB-DU starts the gNB-DU update process, and the gNB-DU sends a gNB-DU configuration update message to the gNB-CU, where the message includes the gNB-DU system information (MIB).
  • MIB gNB-DU system information
  • the gNB-CU responds to the update of the gNB-DU and sends a gNB-DU configuration update acknowledge message to the gNB-DU, where the message carries the updated gNB-CU system information, and the updated system information may be
  • the one-to-one correspondence of the SIBs may also be one-to-one corresponding to the SI, that is, the updated system information may be SIB granularity or SI granularity.
  • the configuration update acknowledge message further includes a system information update indication, where the update indication may only indicate that the system information is updated, that is, a value tag, and if the system information is updated, the value tag value is increased by 1, and thus the receiving end receives After that, it can be identified whether the system information is updated, or the update indication can also specifically indicate which SIB/SI is updated, that is, the SIB granularity or the SI granularity, so that the receiving end can directly identify which SIB is received. /SI updated.
  • the value tag may be SIB granular or SI granular, that is, the value tag corresponds to SIB or SI one-to-one.
  • the message further includes an area ID, where the area ID is used to indicate an area in which the updated system information is valid.
  • the combination of the area ID and the value tag may indicate whether system information of a plurality of cells of a larger range is valid.
  • the gNB-CU starts the gNB-CU update process, and sends a gNB-CU configuration update message to the gNB-DU, where the message includes gNB-CU updated system information, the gNB
  • the system information of the CU update is similar to that described above, that is, it may include one or more of updated system information SIB/SI, update indication/value tag, area ID, and will not be described here; gNB-DU response
  • the gNB-CU is updated and sends a gNB-CU configuration update acknowledge message to the gNB-CU.
  • the transmission method 100 according to the embodiment of the present application is described in detail with reference to FIG. 6.
  • the method 100 describes how to indicate the effective area of the system information to the terminal device.
  • the following describes the embodiment according to the application in detail with reference to FIG.
  • the transmission method 200, the method 200, describes the process of determining the configuration information of the system information.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a transmission method 200 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first network node in the transmission method 200 may be the first network node in FIG. 1 , and may also be In the DU of FIG. 2
  • the second network node in the transmission method 200 may be the second network node in FIG. 1, and may also be the CU in FIG. 2.
  • the method 200 includes:
  • the first network node sends system information of the first network node to the second network node, where the second network node receives system information of the first network node sent by the first network node.
  • the first network node may be the gNB-DU in FIG. 3, and the second network node is the gNB-CU in FIG. 3.
  • the gNB-DU may establish the system information of the gNB-DU in the request message through the F1 interface.
  • the system information is in the form of an RRC container
  • the system information of the gNB-DU may be MIB, SIB1
  • the content of the MIB and the SIB1 may be similar to the MIB and SIB1 defined by the existing LTE/NR, for the sake of brevity. No longer.
  • the gNB-DU can also carry the system information of the gNB-DU through the configuration update message of the gNB-DU, and can also carry the system information of the gNB-DU in the configuration update confirmation message of the gNB-CU through the gNB-DU.
  • the F1 interface setup message, the configuration update message of the gNB-DU, and the configuration update message of the gNB-CU can all be used to exchange system information, and the system information of the interaction may be the same or different.
  • the second network node sends first configuration information to the first network node, where the first network node receives the first configuration information from the second network node, where the first configuration information includes at least one system information block. And at least one of scheduling information of the at least one system information block, a mapping relationship between the at least one system information and the at least one system information block, and a scheduling period of each system information in the at least one system information.
  • the scheduling information of the at least one system information block includes a scheduling period of each system information block in the at least one system information block, a warning area list of each system information block in the at least one system information block, and the at least one system At least one of the number of broadcasts of each system information block in the message.
  • the first network node determines second configuration information, where the second configuration information is used by the first network node to send the at least one system information, where the second configuration information includes each system information in the at least one system information. a window length, scheduling information of the at least one system information block, a mapping relationship between the at least one system information and the at least one system information block, and at least one of a scheduling period of each system information in the at least one system information.
  • the second network node sends the first configuration information to the first network node, where the first configuration information includes at least one system information block, scheduling information of the at least one system information block, the at least one system information, and At least one of a mapping relationship of the at least one system information block and a scheduling period of each system information in the at least one system information, after the first network node receives the first configuration information from the second network node, Determining, by the first network node, the second configuration information, where the second configuration information is used by the first network node to send the at least one system information, where the second configuration information includes a window of each system information in the at least one system information The length, the scheduling information of the at least one system information block, the mapping relationship between the at least one system information and the at least one system information block, and at least one of a scheduling period of each system information in the at least one system information.
  • the following is a description of the first network node as the gNB-DU in FIG. 3, and the second network node is the gNB-CU in FIG. 3 as an example.
  • the gNB-DU and the gNB-CU establish a message through the F1 interface to perform system information. Interaction.
  • the gNB-CU sends the first configuration information to the gNB-DU, and the gNB-DU receives the first configuration information sent by the gNB-CU, where the first configuration information is an SIB in all Other SIs (except MIB and SIB1).
  • SIBs such as SIB2, SIB3, SIB4, ...) and all SIB scheduling information in Other SIs, wherein the scheduling information of the SIB in the other SIs is optional.
  • Table 6 shows the cell information of the first configuration information, as shown in Table 6.
  • SIB list >SIB type >>SIB message(SIB container) >>SIB schdule infomation
  • SIB type in Table 6 may be SIB2, SIB3, etc., and the SIB message may also be referred to as an SIB container.
  • the specific content is similar to the definition in LTE/NR, and is not described here for brevity.
  • the scheduling information of the specific SIB in the Other SIs needs to be sent to the gNB- DU
  • the scheduling information of the specific SIB in the Other SIs may be at least one of the scheduling period/transmission period of the specific SIB in Other SIs, the warning area list of the specific SIB in Other SIs, and the broadcast number of the specific SIB in Other SIs. section.
  • the alert area list of the SIB may be a cell list, a tracking area list, and an emergency area list.
  • the cell identifier may be a global cell identifier (CGI)
  • the tracking area list is a tracking area identifier. (Tracking Area identity, TAI) and other identification information.
  • the scheduling period/transmission period of the specific SIB in Other SIs, the list of specific SIBs in Other SIs, and the number of broadcasts of specific SIBs in Other SIs are mainly applicable to SIB10, SIB11 and SIB12 for earthquake warning.
  • the gNB-DU receives the configuration information, it can be used directly or as a reference. The application is not limited thereto.
  • the gNB-DU can determine the second configuration information, where the second configuration information is the SI window length (SI-window length) in the other SIs, the mapping relationship between the SI and the SIB, and the scheduling period of the SI. (SI-periodicity).
  • mapping relationship between SI and SIB is the specific SIB type (SIB-mappinginfo) included in the corresponding SI.
  • the gNB-DU may refer to the scheduling information of the SI in the Other SIs sent by the gNB-CU, or may use it as a reference to re-determine the scheduling information of the SI in the Other SIs.
  • the gNB-DU determines the SI according to the transmission period of the SI and the scheduling information of the SIB.
  • the mapping relationship with the SIB for example, the gNB-DU determines that the transmission period of the SI1 is 160 ms, and the transmission period of the SIB2 and the SIB3 is also 160 ms, and the gNB-DU broadcasts the SIB2 and the SIB3 to the terminal device in SI1; the gNB-DU determines
  • the transmission period of SI2 is 320ms
  • the transmission period of SIB4 and SIB5 is also 320ms.
  • the gNB-DU broadcasts SIB4 and SIB5 to the terminal equipment in SI2.
  • the gNB-DU determines that the transmission period of SI3 is 320ms, and the transmission period of SIB6 is also For 320 ms, the gNB-DU broadcasts the SIB6 to the terminal device in SI3; the gNB-DU determines that the transmission period of the SI4 is 640 ms, and the transmission period of the SIB6 is also 640 ms, and the gNB-DU broadcasts the SIB7 to the terminal in the SI4.
  • the device determines that the mapping relationship between the SI and the SIB is to be broadcasted to the terminal device in the SIB1.
  • each SI is transmitted only in one SI window: (1) one SI is associated with one SI window, and only this SI can be sent in the SI window and can be repeatedly transmitted multiple times (how many times, in which subframes) On the transmission, etc., depending on the implementation of the network device), but can not send other SI messages; (2) the SI windows are next to each other (if adjacent), neither overlap nor gap; (3) The SI window lengths of all SIs are the same; (4) The periods of different SIs are independent of each other.
  • gNB-DU determines the SI configuration and directly encodes and broadcasts. Otherwise, if other SIs are encoded by gNB-CU, then gNB-DU needs to decide.
  • the mapping between the SI and the SIB is sent to the gNB-CU, which is encoded by the gNB-CU and then sent to the gNB-DU for broadcast by the DU. It should be understood that the meaning of the code can be understood as the generation of each SI of the other SIs. .)
  • the gNB-CU sends the first configuration information to the gNB-DU, and the gNB-DU receives the first configuration information sent by the gNB-CU, where the first configuration information is a schedule of all Other SIs and all Other SIs. Mapping relationship between information, SI, and SIB.
  • Table 7 shows a cell information of the first configuration information, as shown in Table 7.
  • the SI IDs in Table 7 may be SI1, SI2, etc., and which SIBs are included in the specific SI are determined by the gNB-CU.
  • the specific content of the SIB is similar to the definition in the LTE/NR, and is not described here for brevity.
  • the gNB-DU After receiving the first configuration information, the gNB-DU can determine the second configuration information, the SI-window length of the second configuration information, and the scheduling period of the SI.
  • the NB-CU sends the first configuration information to the gNB-DU, and the gNB-DU receives the first configuration information sent by the gNB-CU, where the first configuration information is scheduling of all Other SIs and all Other SIs. Information, mapping relationship between SI and SIB, and scheduling period of SI.
  • Table 8 shows the cell information of the first configuration information, as shown in Table 8.
  • SI list >SI ID >SI message >>SI-periodicity >>SIB-mappinginfo >>>SIB type >>>>SIB message(SIB container)
  • the gNB-DU may determine the second configuration information, which is a SI-window length.
  • the interaction of the above system information may also be replaced by the gNB-DU configuration update message, that is, the gNB-DU starts the gNB-DU update process, and sends a gNB-DU configuration update message to the gNB-CU, where the message includes the gNB-DU.
  • System information (the system information is in the form of an RRC container), the gNB-CU responds to the update of the gNB-DU and sends a gNB-DU configuration update acknowledge message to the gNB-DU, where the message includes the first configuration information
  • the system information is in the form of an RRC container.
  • the system information of the gNB-DU and the first configuration information are the same as those described above. For brevity, details are not described herein again.
  • the interaction of the foregoing system information may also be replaced by the gNB-CU configuration update message, that is, the gNB-CU starts the gNB-CU update process, and sends a gNB-CU configuration update message to the gNB-DU, the message including the first
  • the configuration information (the first configuration information is in the form of an RRC container)
  • the gNB-DU responds to the update of the gNB-CU and sends a gNB-CU configuration update acknowledge message to the gNB-CU, where the message includes the gNB-DU system information.
  • the system information is in the form of an RRC container
  • the system information of the gNB-DU and the first configuration information are the same as those described above, and are not described herein again for brevity.
  • the first network node sends the at least one system information to the terminal device, where the terminal device receives the at least one system information sent by the first network node.
  • the transmission method of the embodiment of the present application by receiving the configuration information of the second network node system information by the first network node, helps the first network node to determine the configuration information of the at least one system information, thereby broadcasting the system information to the terminal device. .
  • the first indication information in the method 100 and the first configuration information in the method 200 may be simultaneously carried in a message (F1 setup update message and configuration update message) sent by the gNB-CU to the gNB-DU, and the gNB-CU gives A list of possible cells sent by the gNB-DU is shown in Table 9, Table 10, and Table 11.
  • bitmaps in Table 12, Table 13, and Table 14 are optional.
  • the list of possible cells sent by the gNB-CU to the gNB-DU may also be as shown in Table 15, Table 16, and Table 17.
  • bitmaps in Table 15, Table 16, and Table 17 are optional.
  • the area ID in the above table can be a value, it can also be a list. If the area ID is a value, the area ID of the cell is the area ID; if the area ID is a list, The cell also needs to configure an area ID', and the area ID' is used to indicate the area ID of the cell. Take Table 18 as an example:
  • the transmission method 200 according to the embodiment of the present application is described above with reference to FIG. 7.
  • the configuration of the system information in the method 200 is determined by the first network node.
  • the transmission method 300 of the embodiment of the present application is described below with reference to FIG.
  • the configuration of the system information is determined by the second network node.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of a transmission method 300 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first network node in the transmission method 300 may be the first network node in FIG. 1 , and may also be The DU in FIG. 2
  • the second network node in the transmission method 300 may be the second network node in FIG. 1, and may also be the CU in FIG. 2.
  • the method 300 includes:
  • the first network node sends system information of the first network node to the second network node, where the second network node receives system information from the first network node.
  • the second network node determines third configuration information, where the third configuration information includes a window length of each system information in the at least one system information, scheduling information of the at least one system information block, the at least one system information, and at least one A mapping relationship of the system information block, at least one of a scheduling period of each system information in the at least one system information.
  • the first network node sends system information of the first network node to the second network node, and the second network node determines the third configuration information, where the third configuration information includes each of at least one system information. At least one of a window length of the system information, scheduling information of the at least one system information block, a mapping relationship of the at least one system information and the at least one system information block, and a scheduling period of each system information in the at least one system information.
  • the following is a description of the first network node as the gNB-DU in FIG. 3, and the second network node is the gNB-CU in FIG. 3 as an example.
  • the gNB-DU and the gNB-CU exchange system information through the F1 interface message. .
  • the gNB-CU and the gNB-DU establish a message through the F1 interface or the gNB-CU/gNB-DU configuration update message, specifically:
  • the gNB-DU starts the F1 interface and sends an F1 setup request message to the gNB-CU.
  • the message includes the system information of the gNB-DU.
  • the system information of the gNB-DU can be the MIB, the SIB1, and the specific content of the MIB and the SIB1 can be similar to the existing LTE. MIB and SIB1 defined by /NR, for brevity, will not be described here.
  • the gNB-CU responds to the request of the gNB-DU and sends an F1 setup response message to the gNB-DU, where the message includes the SI configuration information determined by the gNB-CU, and the SI configuration information may be configured before Step 1.1, or may be configured. After being configured thereafter, the application is not limited thereto.
  • the gNB-CU determines the third configuration information, where the third configuration information is the SI window length of the other SIs, the SIB scheduling information in the other SIs, the mapping relationship between the SI and the SIB, and at least one of the scheduling periods of the SI.
  • the third configuration information is the SI window length of the other SIs, the SIB scheduling information in the other SIs, the mapping relationship between the SI and the SIB, and at least one of the scheduling periods of the SI.
  • the third configuration information is the SI window length of the other SIs, the SIB scheduling information in the other SIs, the mapping relationship between the SI and the SIB, and at least one of the scheduling periods of the SI.
  • the third configuration information is the SI window length of the other SIs, the SIB scheduling information in the other SIs, the mapping relationship between the SI and the SIB, and at least one of the scheduling periods of the SI.
  • the third configuration information is the SI window length of the other SIs, the SIB scheduling information in the other SIs, the mapping relationship between the SI and the SIB
  • the above steps may also be replaced by a configuration update message of the gNB-CU/gNB-DU.
  • the message sent by the gNB-CU to the gNB-DU may further carry an area ID.
  • the definition of the effective area is as described in the foregoing embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
  • the determination of the configuration information of the effective area and system information and the interaction between the network nodes are described in detail above with reference to FIG. 6 to FIG. 9.
  • the terminal device is requesting system information or system in detail below with reference to FIG. 10 and FIG. The flow of information blocks.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a transmission method 400 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first network node in the transmission method 400 may be the first network node in FIG.
  • the DU in FIG. 2 the second network node in the transmission method 400 may be the second network node in FIG. 1, and may also be the CU in FIG. 2.
  • the method 400 includes:
  • the first network node determines that the terminal device uses the first message request system information or the system information block, where the first message is a random access first message or a random access third message, and the first network node includes a wireless link layer. Controlling at least one of a protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function;
  • the first network node sends the third indication information to the terminal device, where the terminal device receives the third indication information from the first network node, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device uses the first
  • the message requests system information or a system information block.
  • the terminal device may request system information or system information block from the first network node according to the third indication information; or the terminal device requests system information from the second network node according to the third indication information or System information block.
  • the first network node first determines that the terminal device requests the SI or the SIB by using the first message, where the first message is a random access first message (MSG1) or a random access third message (MSG3), the first The network node sends the third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device requests the system information or the system information block by using the first message, and the terminal device sends the third information to the first network according to the third indication information.
  • the device requests an SI or SIB.
  • the first network node determines that the terminal device requests the SI from the first network node by using the MSG1, where the third indication information is further used to indicate a mapping relationship between the at least one system information or the system information block and the random access preamble sequence. .
  • the gNB-DU determines the mapping relationship between the system information requested by the terminal device and the preamble code, and then broadcasts the mapping relationship to the terminal device in the system information (for example, SIB1).
  • the terminal device sends Preamble1 to indicate SI1, and preamble2 to apply for SI2.
  • the DU receives the preamble of the UE, the SI corresponding to the preamble is broadcast according to the correspondence between the preamble and the SI.
  • the first network node determines that the terminal device requests the system information or the system information block by using the MSG1 or the MSG3, and helps the terminal device to explicitly request the system information when requesting the system information or the system information block.
  • the first network node determines that the terminal device requests the SI/SIB from the first network node by using the MSG1, and the method 400 further includes:
  • the first network node sends system information request response information to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives system information request response information sent by the first network node.
  • the first network node determines that the terminal device requests the SI/SIB from the second network node by using the MSG1, and the method 400 further includes:
  • the first network node sends the bitmap indication information to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the bitmap indication information sent by the first network node, where the bitmap indication information is used to indicate system information or a system information block sent to the terminal device.
  • the system information request response includes at least one of response information (such as ack) and a bitmap indication, where the bitmap indication is used to indicate which SI/SIBs have been broadcast, specifically:
  • the system information request response may be included in a medium access control layer MAC header, and sent by the first network node to the terminal device by using a media access control layer control element MAC CE;
  • the system information request response may be included in the system message/system information, and sent by the first network node to the terminal device through a system broadcast message.
  • the first network node or the second network node may use bitmap to indicate which SI/SIBs It has been broadcast so that the terminal device can read the required system information as needed.
  • UE1 requests SI2 from the DU through MSG1, and UE2 requests SI3 from the DU through MSG1.
  • the DU may send bitmap indication information to UE1 while broadcasting SI2 and SI3.
  • the bitmap indication information is used to indicate that SI2 and SI3 have been broadcast, and UE1 may use SI2, when UE1 needs to use SI3, UE1 can directly use SI3 because the bitmap indication information is received before.
  • the first network node determines that the terminal device requests the SI/SIB from the second network node by using the MSG3, and the method 400 further includes:
  • the second network node sends the system information request response information to the first network node, where the first network node receives the system information request response information sent by the second network node, and sends the system information request response information to the terminal device; or the second network node
  • the system information request response information is forwarded to the terminal device by the first network node, and the terminal device receives the system information request response information sent by the first network node.
  • the first network node determines that the terminal device requests the SI/SIB from the second network node by using the MSG3, and the method 400 further includes:
  • the second network node sends the bitmap indication information to the first network node, where the first network node receives the bitmap indication information sent by the second network node and sends the bitmap indication information to the terminal device; or the second network node passes the first network
  • the node forwards the bitmap indication information to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the bitmap indication information sent by the first network node, where the bitmap indication information is used to indicate system information or a system information block sent to the terminal device.
  • the second network node when the terminal device requests system information or system information block based on the MSG3, if multiple terminal devices request different SI/SIBs at the same time, the second network node sends a system information request response after receiving the request, and Included in the system information request response, the system information request response information (such as ack), the response information is used to indicate that the system information requested by the terminal device has responded and is about to be broadcasted.
  • the system information request response is further A bitmap indication information may be included, where the bitmap indication information is used to indicate which SI/SIBs have been broadcasted.
  • the system information request response may further include a conflict resolution identification information (CRID).
  • CRID conflict resolution identification information
  • the CU receives the request message and identifies that it is a system information request, then the CU replies with the system information request response information, and also sends the system information transmission command information to the DU (eg, the system information transmission command information is sent from the CU through the system information command message).
  • the CU may also send a bitmap indication information, where the system information request response information is used to indicate that the terminal device system information is about to be broadcasted, and the system information transmission command message is sent to the DU for commanding the DU to broadcast the request.
  • the system information, the bitmap indication information is used to indicate which system information or system information block of the UE has been broadcast.
  • the system information request response information may be sent by using an RRC message: the RRC message is sent by the CU to the terminal device, for example, the RRC message may be a random access fourth message (MSG4), that is, an RRC connection setup message, specific
  • MSG4 random access fourth message
  • the CU sends the system information request response to the terminal device by using the DL RRC message transfer message between the CU and the DU, and the DU forwards the RRC message to the UE;
  • the system information request response information may be sent by using a MAC CE message: the MAC CE message is generated by the DU, and then the system information request response may be sent to the DU by the CU and the F1 interface message of the DU, for example, sent by the CU.
  • the system information command message is sent to the DU, or is a new message.
  • the application is not limited.
  • the identifier information (UE ID) of the terminal device is added to the message, and the system information request response response is sent to which terminal device. After receiving the DU, the response is included in the MAC header and sent to the terminal device through the MAC CE.
  • Command message is a system information command message.
  • bitmap indication may be either a CU generation or a DU generation.
  • the bitmap indication information generated by the CU may be sent to the terminal device through the RRC message, or the CU may first send the bitmap indication information to the DU through the F1 interface, and the DU sends the information to the terminal device through the MAC CE. Information sending process.
  • the DU If the DU is generated, the DU generates the bitmap indication information after receiving the system information sent by the CU in the system information delivery message, and then the DU adds the bitmap indication information to the MAC header and sends the information to the terminal device through the MAC CE. Same as the response message sending process.
  • system information request response information is optional.
  • the conflict resolution identification information may also be generated by the CU, or may be generated by the DU, and sent to the terminal device through the RRC message or the MAC CE method, and the same bitmap indicates the information transmission process.
  • the terminal device is based on MSG1 or
  • the system information request response and the transmission method of the bitmap indication when the MSG3 requests the system information or the system information block may adopt the above manner. This application is not limited.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a transmission method 500 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first network node in the transmission method 500 may be the first network node in FIG. 1 , and may also be The DU in FIG. 2
  • the second network node in the transmission method 500 may be the second network node in FIG. 1, and may also be the CU in FIG. 2.
  • the method 500 includes:
  • the second network node determines that the terminal device uses the first message requesting system information or a system information block, where the first message is a random access first message or a random access third message, and the second network node includes a radio resource control protocol. At least one of a layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer;
  • the second network node sends the third indication information to the first network node, where the first network node receives the third indication information from the second network node, where the third indication information is used to indicate the first network
  • the node sends a fourth indication information to the terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device requests the system information or the system information block by using the first message, where the first network node includes a radio link layer control protocol layer and a media. At least one of an access control layer and a physical layer function;
  • the terminal device requests system information or system information block from the first network node according to the fourth indication information; or the terminal device requests system information or system from the second network node according to the fourth indication information.
  • Information block
  • the second network node first determines that the terminal device uses the MSG1 or the MSG3 to request the SI or the SIB, and the second network node sends the third indication information to the first network node, where the third indication information is used to indicate the The first network node sends fourth indication information to the terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the system information or the system information block is requested by using the MSG1 or the MSG3.
  • the first message is a random access first message
  • the third indication information is further used to indicate a mapping relationship between the at least one system information and the random access preamble sequence.
  • the CU determines whether the terminal device uses the MSG1 or the MSG3, and the CU determines to send the third indication information to the DU.
  • the third indication information includes the mapping relationship between the system information and the preamble sequence or the mapping relationship between the system information block and the preamble sequence.
  • the indication information is added to the system message (for example, SIB1) and sent to the terminal device.
  • the first message is a random access first message
  • the fourth indication information is further used to indicate a mapping relationship between the at least one system information and the random access preamble sequence.
  • the CU determines whether the terminal device uses the MSG1 or the MSG3, and after the CU determines, sends the third indication information to the DU, and the third indication information indicates whether it is the MSG1 or the MSG3, such as 0, 1, etc., after the DU receives the MSG1 or the MSG3, if MSG1, then the DU constructs fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information includes a mapping relationship between the system information and the preamble sequence or a mapping relationship between the system information block and the preamble sequence, and then the DU adds the fourth indication information to the system message and sends the fourth indication information to the system.
  • the terminal device determines whether the terminal device uses the MSG1 or the MSG3, and after the CU determines, sends the third indication information to the DU, and the third indication information indicates whether it is the MSG1 or the MSG3, such as 0, 1, etc.
  • the DU constructs fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information includes a mapping relationship between the system information and the preamble sequence or a
  • the first message is a random access third message
  • the third indication information is further used by the first network node to indicate to the terminal device that the system information is requested by using the random access third message, or
  • the three indication information is used by the first network node to indicate to the terminal device that the system information block is requested by using the random access third message.
  • the CU determines whether the terminal device uses the MSG1 or the MSG3, and further uses the MSG3 to further indicate whether the request for using the system information of the MSG3 is SI or SIB, and sends an indication to the DU, and after the DU receives the indication, sends the indication to the Terminal Equipment.
  • the second network node determines that the terminal device requests the SI/SIB from the first network node by using the MSG1, and the method 500 further includes:
  • the first network node sends system information request response information to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives system information request response information sent by the first network node.
  • the second network node determines that the terminal device requests the SI/SIB from the second network node by using the MSG1, and the method 500 further includes:
  • the first network node sends the bitmap indication information to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the bitmap indication information sent by the first network node, where the bitmap indication information is used to indicate system information sent to the terminal device.
  • the system information request response includes at least one of response information (such as ack) and a bitmap indication, where the bitmap indication is used to indicate which SI/SIBs have been broadcast, specifically:
  • the system information request response may be included in a medium access control layer MAC header, and sent by the first network node to the terminal device by using a media access control layer control element MAC CE;
  • the system information request response may be included in the system message/system information, and sent by the first network node to the terminal device by using a system broadcast message;
  • the second network node determines that the terminal device requests the SI/SIB from the second network node by using the MSG3, and the method 500 further includes:
  • the second network node sends the system information request response information to the first network node, where the first network node receives the system information request response information sent by the second network node, and sends the system information request response information to the terminal device; or the second network node
  • the system information request response information is forwarded to the terminal device by the first network node, and the terminal device receives the system information request response information sent by the first network node.
  • the second network node determines that the terminal device requests the SI/SIB from the second network node by using the MSG3, and the method 500 further includes:
  • the second network node sends the bitmap indication information to the first network node, where the first network node receives the bitmap indication information sent by the second network node and sends the bitmap indication information to the terminal device; or the second network node passes the first network
  • the node forwards the bitmap indication information to the terminal device, and the terminal device receives the bitmap indication information sent by the first network node, where the bitmap indication information is used to indicate system information or a system information block sent to the terminal device.
  • the second network node when the terminal device requests system information or system information block based on the MSG3, if multiple terminal devices request different SI/SIBs at the same time, the second network node sends a system information request response after receiving the request, and Included in the request response, the system information request response information (such as ack) is used to indicate that the system information requested by the terminal device has responded and is about to be broadcasted.
  • the system information response request may further include a The bitmap indicates that the bitmap indication is used to indicate which SI/SIBs have been broadcast. It should be understood that the system information request response, the conflict resolution identifier, and the bitmap indication information included in the system information response request are similar to those in the method 400. For brevity, details are not described herein again.
  • the bitmap indication included in the system information response request may be included in the RRC message, where the second network node initiates an RRC message to carry the bitmap indication and forwards the same to the terminal device through the first network node;
  • the system information response request may be further included in a media access control layer MAC header of the first network node, where the first network node passes the medium access control layer control element (MAC CE) by the first The network node sends the bitmap to the terminal device.
  • the bitmap indication may be generated by the first network node and added in the MAC header, that is, the first network node generates a bitmap according to the requested system information sent by the second network node.
  • the indication may be generated by the second network node, and then the second network node may send the first network node to the system information response request through the interface message eight, and the interface message may also need to indicate a specific The identification information (UE ID) of the terminal device, after the first network node receives the bitmap indication, adds the bitmap indication to the MAC header, and sends the information to the terminal device by using the MAC CE.
  • UE ID The identification information
  • the bitmap indication may be in a form similar to 0100, and other possible forms are not limited in this application.
  • system information response request may also include only a bitmap indication, and does not include response information (ack).
  • the CU determines whether the terminal device uses the MSG1 or the MSG3 or the DU to determine whether the terminal device uses the MSG1 or the MSG3, or uses other methods to determine whether to use the MSG1 or the MSG3 to request system information or a system information block, the terminal device is based on the MSG1 or
  • the system information request response and the transmission method of the bitmap indication when the MSG3 requests the system information or the system information block may adopt the above manner. This application is not limited.
  • the method 400 and the method 500 according to the embodiments of the present application are described in detail above with reference to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, which determine the terminal device request system information or system through the first network node and the second network node, respectively.
  • the manner of the information block the following describes the transmission method 600 according to the embodiment of the present application in detail with reference to FIG. 12, and the method 600 mainly introduces a process of requesting resource status between network devices.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of a transmission method 600 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first network node in the transmission method 600 may be the first network node in FIG.
  • the DU in FIG. 2 the second network node in the transmission method 600 may be the second network node in FIG. 1, and may also be the CU in FIG. 2.
  • the method 600 includes:
  • the first network node sends, to the second network node, first resource state information, where the first resource state information includes at least one of a physical resource block, a hardware load, and an almost blank subframe, where the first network node includes a wireless chain.
  • first resource state information includes at least one of a physical resource block, a hardware load, and an almost blank subframe, where the first network node includes a wireless chain.
  • the second network node including at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer;
  • the second network node sends second resource state information to the third network node, where the second resource state information includes a physical resource block, a hardware load, an almost blank subframe, a transport network layer load, an available capacity, and a reference signal receiving. At least one of a power measurement report and a channel state information report.
  • the first network node may periodically report the first resource status information measured by the first network node to the second network node, where the period may be configured by the second network node or may be configured by The first network node is pre-configured, and the first resource state information includes at least one of a physical resource block (PRB), a hardware load (HW load), and an almost blank subframe (ABS).
  • PRB physical resource block
  • HW load hardware load
  • ABS almost blank subframe
  • the second network node determines at least one of a transport network layer load, an available capacity, a reference signal received power measurement report, and a channel state information report, and then the second network node reports the second resource state information to the third network node,
  • the second resource status information includes a physical resource block, a hardware load, an almost blank subframe, a transport network layer load (TNL load), a available capacity (Composite Available Capacity), and a reference signal receiving power (RSRP) measurement report. At least one of a Channel Status Information (CSI) report.
  • CSI Channel Status Information
  • the first network node may be gNB1-DU in FIG. 3
  • the second network node may be gNB1-CU in FIG. 3
  • the third network node may be gNB2 in FIG. 3, or the first The three network nodes are the CUs of gNB2 in FIG.
  • the method 600 further includes:
  • the second network node receives a second resource status request message sent by the third network node, where the second resource request message is used to request the second resource status information.
  • the second network node sends a first resource status request message to the first network node, where the first resource status request message is used to request the first resource status information.
  • the third network node may request the second resource status information from the second network node, where the second resource status information includes a physical resource block, a hardware load, an almost blank subframe, a transport network layer load, and an available capacity. And at least one of a reference signal receiving power measurement report and a channel state information report, the second network node requesting the first resource state information from the first network node.
  • the transmission method 600 further includes:
  • the third network node sends third resource status information to the second network node, where the second network node receives the third resource status information sent by the third network node, where the third resource status information includes physical resource blocks and hardware. At least one of a load, an almost blank subframe, a transmission network layer load, an available capacity, a reference signal received power measurement report, and a channel state information report;
  • the fourth resource status information includes at least one of a physical resource block, a hardware load, and an almost blank subframe.
  • the third network node may request the second resource state information from the second network node, or may send the third resource state information of the third network node to the second network node, where the second network node After receiving the third resource status information of the third network node, sending, by the first network node, the first network node to send the fourth resource status information, where the first network node may perform loading according to the fourth resource status information.
  • Related work such as coordination.
  • the resource status information is sent to the second network node by using the first network node, which helps solve the problem that the resource status of the network device requests each other.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic flowchart of a transmission method 700 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first network node in the transmission method 700 may be the first network node in FIG. 1 , and may also be In the DU of FIG. 2
  • the second network node in the transmission method 700 may be the second network node in FIG. 1, and may also be the CU in FIG. 2.
  • the method 700 includes:
  • the terminal device generates a second message, where the second message includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device requests system information, or the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device requests to establish RRC connection;
  • the second message generated by the terminal device where the second message is carried in the first logical channel or the second logical information, where the first logical information is used to carry a message requesting system information, and the second logical channel is used to carry the request RRC. Connected messages.
  • the terminal device generates a second message, where the second message uses a first logical channel identifier or a second logical channel identifier, where the first logical channel identifier is used to identify a message requesting system information, and the second logical channel identifier is Used to identify a message requesting an RRC connection;
  • the terminal device first generates an RRC message, where the RRC message includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device requests system information, or the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device requests Establish an RRC connection.
  • the logical channel identifier may also be used to distinguish whether the message sent by the terminal device requests system information or requests the RRC connection.
  • the RRC message may also be referred to as a Common Control Channel (CCCH) message, and the CCCH is used to carry the RRC message.
  • the RRC message that the CCCH can carry includes but is not limited to: RRC reset (resume) message, RRC The re-establishment message, the RRC connection setup request message, and the system information request message.
  • the RRC reset message, the RRC re-establishment message, and the RRC connection setup request message may be classified into a first type of RRC message, and the first type of RRC message is used to request to establish an RRC connection; the system information request message may be classified as
  • the second type of RRC message is used to request system information, for example, the system information request message may be MSG3.
  • FIG. 14 shows a schematic diagram of a MAC protocol layer of an RRC message.
  • the terminal device adds the fourth indication information to the MAC header.
  • the indication information (such as 0, 1) may be added in the R field or the F field, for example, 0 represents the first type of RRC message. , 1 represents the second type of RRC message.
  • the terminal device sends a system information request message by using a new logical channel or a logical channel identifier, that is, the logical channel or logical channel identifier used by the system information request message is different from a logical channel used by other RRC connection setup messages or Logical channel identification
  • the terminal device when the terminal device uses the new logical channel identifier to send the system information request message, the terminal device carries a new logical channel identifier (LCID) in the MAC header, where the LCID is when the terminal device initiates the RRC message.
  • the new LCID may be obtained by a protocol or by other means such as a base station configuration, which is not limited in this application.
  • the RRC message may apply new CCCE configuration information, which has a new LCID, which may be predefined by the protocol, the new CCCE configuration. It can be transmitted in a new Signalling Radio Bearer (SRB) or on an existing SRB0.
  • SRB Signalling Radio Bearer
  • Table 19 shows a new CCCH configuration, as shown in Table 19.
  • the terminal device adds the fourth indication information to the RLC header, where the fourth indication information is added in the RLC header of the RRC message when the terminal device initiates the RRC message.
  • the fourth indication information is message type identification type identification information of the second message, where the message type identification information is used to identify that the RRC message is a first type of RRC message or a second type of RRC message, specifically,
  • the message type includes one of a first type of RRC message and a second type of RRC message.
  • the first type of RRC message includes, but is not limited to, the foregoing three types.
  • the first type of RRC message may also have other uses.
  • the first type of RRC message may be used to request other requests than system information.
  • the embodiment of the present application aims to distinguish between an RRC message requesting system information and other RRC messages.
  • the terminal device sends the second message to the first network node, where the first network node receives the second message from the terminal device.
  • the first network node sends a third message to the second network node, where the second network node receives the third message sent by the first network node, where the third message includes a first container, where the first container is
  • the content may indicate that the terminal device needs to request system information or a system information block, or may indicate that the terminal device needs other purposes such as RRC connection establishment, and the second network node includes a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet. At least one of the data aggregation protocol layers.
  • the third message may be an initial UL RRC message transfer message
  • the first container is an RRC-container
  • the RRC-container in the first container includes a message type and a message content of an RRC message of the terminal device.
  • the purpose of the third message is For requesting system information or establishing an RRC connection, such as RRC connection setup or RRC connection re-establish or RRC connection resume, etc., specifically, the second network node may confirm the third message according to the type of message included in the first container. Or the purpose of the second message.
  • the first network node may also add an indication indicating the type of the second message of the second network node (
  • the type of the second message includes at least one of requesting system information or establishing an RRC connection, such as a system information request, a system information block request, an RRC connection setup, an RRC connection re-establish, and an RRC connection resume, so that After receiving the third message, the second network node directly identifies the purpose of the third message (the purpose includes requesting system information or establishing an RRC connection, such as a system information request, a system information block request, an RRC connection setup, At least one of RRC connection re-establish and RRC connection resume).
  • the method 700 further includes:
  • the first network node identifies the second message.
  • the first network node identifies the second message, for example, may identify a MAC protocol layer of the second message, and if the R field is 1, determine the second message. The message is used to request the SI/SIB. If the R field is 0, it is determined that the RRC message is for other purposes; or, the LCID in the MAC protocol layer of the second message is identified, if the LCID is a protocol-defined LCID for requesting system information.
  • the second message is used to request the SI/SIB, otherwise, the second message is determined to be used for other purposes; or, whether the second message is transmitted by the new logical channel or other If the logical channel is transmitted, if the new logical channel is transmitted (the new logical channel can be a protocol definition, such as LCID 4, that is, corresponding to SRB4), it is determined that the second message is used to request the SI/SIB; otherwise, the The second message is for other purposes.
  • the new logical channel can be a protocol definition, such as LCID 4, that is, corresponding to SRB4
  • the second message may be an RRC message
  • the third message may be a UL RRC message transfer message
  • the RRC message may be sent as a Container in the UL RRC message transfer message to send the second network node.
  • the first network node has a partial RRC function, and the first network node may determine that the RRC message is used to request SI/SIB or for other by identifying a message type in the RRC message sent by the terminal device. use.
  • the first network node is a DU
  • the second network node is a CU.
  • the DU After identifying that the RRC message is used to request the SI/SIB, the DU directly sends the initial UL RRC message to the CU, the initial UL RRC message.
  • the DU to CU RRC Container may not be included in the message (the DU to CU RRC Container is used for CU trigger establishment of SRB1).
  • the access control of the RRC message is performed, that is, the DU has an admission control function for the system information request, if the DU does not allow the RRC message to be accessed.
  • the DU directly sends the reject indication information to the terminal device, and the reject indication information is included in the MAC CE.
  • the DU does not allow the RRC message to be accessed, and the DU sends the reject indication information to the CU. The CU then informs the terminal device via the RRC message.
  • the method 700 further includes:
  • the first network node performs admission control on the RRC message.
  • the RRC message includes a first type of RRC message and a second type of RRC message, and the admission control policy is the same for the first type and the second type of RRC message.
  • the first network node may perform S722 after S721, or may only perform S721, or may only perform S722, or may not perform S721 and S722.
  • the second message generated by the terminal device in S710 may not include the fourth indication information, or the terminal device may use the same logical channel to carry the second message, or The terminal device can use the same logical channel identifier to identify the second message.
  • the DU may not perform RRC message identification, and perform admission control on all RRC messages. If the DU does not allow admission, the initial UL RRC message message is directly sent to the CU, and the intial UL RRC message message includes the RRC container.
  • the CU identifies the message type of the RRC message by using content (for example, message type) included in the RRC container included in the intial UL RRC message message, and determines Whether the system information or the system information block request is performed, if it is not the system information or the RRC message requested by the system information block, the CU determines that the RRC message does not include the DU to CU RRC Container, and the CU sends the rejection indication information to the terminal device through the DU. . Otherwise, if the CU recognizes that the RRC message is a system message request through content (eg, message type) in the RRC container, a system message request response is performed.
  • content for example, message type
  • the DU may identify the RRC message, and when the DU identifies that the RRC message is a system information request, if the access is allowed, the DU sends a newly defined message (eg, SI request message transfer) to deliver the RRC message.
  • the newly defined message includes the CGI and the RRC Container (the message type is included in the RRC Container).
  • the CU can recognize that the newly defined message is used to request the SI. Further, the CU needs to pass through the RRC Container.
  • the content of the system information request identifies which one of the SI/SIBs requested by the terminal device.
  • the second network node determines that the third message includes a first container, where the information of the first container indicates that the terminal device needs to request system information or a system information block;
  • the second network node sends at least one of system information request response information, bitmap indication information, and a conflict resolution identifier to the first network node, where the first network node receives the system information request response information sent by the second network node. And at least one of the bitmap indication information and the conflict resolution identifier and the information is sent to the terminal device, or the second network node forwards the system information request response information, the bitmap indication information, and the conflict resolution identifier to the terminal device by using the first network node. At least one of the bitmap indication information is used to indicate system information or a system information block sent to the terminal device.
  • the second network node determines that the third message includes a first container, where the message type indicates that the terminal device requests an RRC connection, and does not request system information or a system information block, and the second network The node further determines that the third message does not include the second container, where the second container is an RRC container of the first network node to the second network node (ie, RRC information of the first network node to the second network node), The second network node sends the reject indication information to the terminal device by using the first network node, where the reject indication information includes a message type of the reject indication.
  • the third message is an initial UL RRC message transfer
  • the first container is an RRC-container
  • the second container is a DU to CU RRC container or a DU to CU RRC information element.
  • the purpose of the third message is to use a transport layer 3 message (such as a DL CCCH message, or an RRC message, or a system information request). It can be understood that the purpose of the third message is to establish an RRC connection or system.
  • the information request where the establishment of the RRC connection includes an RRC connection setup message (RRC connection reestablishment), an RRC connection setup reject message (RRC connection reestablishment reject), an RRC connection setup message (RRC connection setup), an RRC connection reject message (RRC connection reject), and an RRC reset message (RRC resume)
  • the system information request includes at least one of a system information request and a system information block request.
  • the first container includes at least one of a CCCH message and an RRC message of the terminal device, where the CCCH message and the RRC message of the terminal device may each include at least one of a message type and a message content, where the message type includes an RRC connection establishment.
  • RRC connection reestablishment RRC connection reestablishment reject, RRC connection setup, RRC connection reject, RRC reset, RRC reset, system information request, and system information
  • the third message is The purpose is determined according to the information of the first container in the third message, or may be determined by other cells in the third message, which is not limited by the application.
  • the second container includes configuration information of a signalling radio bearer (SRB1).
  • SRB1 signalling radio bearer
  • the second network node determines whether to reject the request of the terminal device according to the purpose of the third message. Specifically, the second network node identifies the message according to the content in the first container included in the third message, and the RRC is requested. a connection (for example, RRC connection setup or RRC connection re-establish or RRC connection resume), if the second message is not included in the third message, the second network node under the assumption that the first network node cannot serve the terminal device Determining the terminal device.
  • the second network node sends the reject indication information to the terminal device by using the first network node, where the reject indication information may include a message type of the reject indication.
  • the CU receives the third message sent by the CU, and the CU identifies, by using the third message, that the third message is a system information request message, specifically, the CU passes the content in the RRC container of the third message (eg, an RRC message).
  • the type message type identifies that the RRC message is a system information request message, and then performs a system message request response.
  • the CU receives the third message sent by the CU, and the CU identifies the system information request message of the third message by using the third message. Specifically, the CU passes the content in the RRC container of the third message (eg, RRC).
  • the message type message type identifies that the RRC message is a first type of RRC message, that is, an RRC message of RRC connection setup or re-establish or resume, that is, the message type corresponding to the RRC message is RRC connection setup or re-
  • the message type of establish or resume (if it is identified that the RRC message is not for system information request), and the CU recognizes that the third message does not include the DU to CU RRC Container (or DU to CU RRC information), then the DU cannot
  • the UT rejects the terminal device, that is, the CU rejects the RRC message of the terminal device.
  • the CU sends the reject indication information to the terminal device by using the DU.
  • the CU may use the DL RRC message transfer message.
  • the rejection indication information is sent to the DU, and the DU is sent to the terminal device.
  • the CU identifies that the RRC message is for a system information request by using a content (eg, a message type) in the RRC container, or the CU identifies that the RRC message is for a system information request by using an SI request message transfer message sent by the DU. Then, the CU sends a system information request response to the terminal device through the DU. Specifically, the CU places the system information request response information (ack) in an RRC connection setup message, where the RRC connection setup message may be encapsulated in a DL RRC message transfer message sent by the CU to the DU, and then the DU The RRC connection setup message is sent to the terminal device.
  • a content eg, a message type
  • SI request message transfer message sent by the DU.
  • the conflict resolution identifier (CRID) needs to be sent to the terminal device.
  • the conflict resolution identifier may be carried in the The RRC connection setup message may be sent in a new message, and the specific sending manner is the same as the sending manner of the system information request response, and details are not described herein again.
  • the CU may also send the system information request response or the CRID to the DU through the DU and CU F1 interface messages (such as the system information delivery command message, or other existing interface messages or new messages, which is not limited in this application).
  • the conflict resolution identifier is added by the DU to the MAC header and sent to the terminal device by the MAC CE.
  • the CU may not send the above response information and the CRID, and the CU sends a bitmap through the DU (for example, there are 4 SIs in the other SIs and 22 SIBs, then the SI is requested for the system information.
  • the bitmap indication may be 0110, 0 means no broadcast, 1 means system information has been broadcasted, and the position of the 0110 corresponds to the SI number one-to-one. If the system information requests SIB, the bitmap indication may be a string of 22 bits.
  • 01 indicates that 0 means no broadcast, 1 means that system information has been broadcast, and the 22-bit position corresponds one-to-one with the number of the SIB) to the terminal device, and the bitmap is used to indicate which system information or system information block is requested.
  • the bitmap indication may be sent by the RRC message of the CU, or the CU may first send the bitmap indication to the DU through the F1 interface message (such as the system information delivery command message) between the CU and the DU.
  • the identifier of the device is further increased by the DU in the MAC header to be sent to the terminal device by using the MAC CE, and the system information request response information and the rushing The same way to solve the identity of sending will not be repeated here.
  • the second network node identifies the RRC container in the third message, thereby determining whether the terminal device requests system information, and avoids that the second network node directly rejects the terminal device requesting system information.
  • the message between the DU and the CU such as the initial UL RRC message trasfer, the DL RRC message transfer, and the UL RRC message transfer, is used to transmit the RRC message of the terminal device, and the RRC message is delivered.
  • the RRC container includes a message type, which is used to describe the RRC message of the terminal device, such as an RRC connection setup message, an SI request message, and the like.
  • FIG. 15 shows a schematic flowchart of a transmission method 800 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the transmission method 800 includes:
  • the terminal device is connected to the first network node and the third network node and can transmit/receive data from the first network node and the third network node.
  • the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function.
  • the third network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function;
  • the first network node may be a DU1
  • the third network node may be a DU2.
  • the UE may connect to the DU1 and the DU2 and send/receive data.
  • the following two scenarios may exist:
  • Scenario 1 The UE has a connection with the DU1 and the DU2, but the bearers established by the DU1 and the DU2 and the UE are different bearers.
  • the CU needs to establish an associated bearer with the UE through the DU2.
  • Scenario 2 The UE has a connection with the DU1 and the DU2, and the DU2 belongs to the backup link of the DU1, and the same bearer is established with the UE. Or, the bearer of the DU2 and the DU1 is partially the same as that of the UE, and the part is different. The present application does not limit this.
  • the first network node finds a problem with its own wireless link.
  • the determination of the radio link problem of the DU1 is implemented by the DU, which is not limited in this application.
  • the first network node sends a first notification message to the user plane node, where the user plane node receives the first notification message sent by the first network node.
  • the DU1 sends a first notification message (a radio link problem notification message, that is, a radio link outage notification message) to the CU-UP through the F1-U interface, and the CU-UP receives the first one sent by the DU1 through the F1-U interface. Notification message.
  • a radio link problem notification message that is, a radio link outage notification message
  • the first notification message may be transmitted through a DDDS PDU, ie as part of a DL DATA DELIVERY STATUS PDU, or may be part of other existing PDUs, or newly defined.
  • the PDU, or a part of the newly defined PDU is not limited in this application.
  • the notification message may further include a SN number of the lost data packet, such as Number of lost F1-U Sequence Number ranges reported, corresponding to PDCP PDUs that have not been transmitted by the DU1.
  • the radio link outage notification message is sent through the F1-U interface, the message is sent to the CU-UP because the CU-UP and the DU have an interface of the user plane.
  • the message of the F1-U interface is a DDDS (DL DATA DELIVERY STATUS) PDU.
  • the message includes an uplink/downlink radio link outage notification, or may be another existing message of the F1-U interface, or It is a new message, and this application does not limit it.
  • the uplink/downlink radio link outage notification may be a cause value or other indication, which is not limited herein.
  • the user plane node sends the first notification message to the control plane node, where the control plane node receives the first notification message sent by the user plane node.
  • the user plane node may be a CU-UP
  • the control plane node may be a CU-CP
  • the CU-UP may send the first notification message by using an E1 AP interface message.
  • the CU-UP After the CU-UP receives the DDDS PDU, the first notification message is read. If the read cause value is known to be a problem with the radio link of the DU, the CU-UP puts the first notification message. It is carried in the E1 AP interface message and sent to the CU-CP.
  • the E1 AP message may be a UE bearer setup/modification request/response message or a UE bearer modification required/confirm message, or may be an existing E1 AP other message, or a new message, this The application does not impose any restrictions on this.
  • control plane node determines whether to replace the first network node.
  • the CU-CP determines whether to replace the DU, that is, whether the decision is to change the data from the DU1 to the DU2, or whether the data is successfully transmitted through the DU2, and the present application is here. Not limited.
  • the link between the CU-CP and the UE transmitted through the DU1 may not be canceled (the subsequent link may also be restored, through the resume process), or the link transmitted by the CU-CP to the UE through the DU1 may also be cancelled. (Subsequent recovery of this link requires rebuilding the link).
  • the CU-CP determines that the replaced DU2 has not allocated the relevant resources for the UE (ie, the scenario 1 described above), the CU-CP also needs to initiate a process for establishing a bearer to the DU2, specifically:
  • the CU-CP sends an F1 AP message UE context setup/modification request to the DU2, and requests the DU2 to establish an associated bearer for data transmission. After receiving the message, the DU2 responds to the F1 AP UE context setup/modification response to the CU-CP.
  • control plane node After the control plane node determines, send a first response message to the user plane node, where the user plane node combines the first response message sent by the control plane node.
  • the first response message is sent to the CU-UP, and the CU-UP receives the first response message sent by the CU-CP, that is, the CU-CP notifies the CU-UP decision result (such as updating the identifier of the DU and the DU). Wait).
  • the first response message may be sent by using an E1 AP interface message, where the E1 AP message may be a UE bearer setup/modification/release request/response message or a UE bearer modification required/confirm message, or may be There are other messages of the E1 AP, or new messages, and this application does not limit this.
  • E1 AP message may be a UE bearer setup/modification/release request/response message or a UE bearer modification required/confirm message, or may be There are other messages of the E1 AP, or new messages, and this application does not limit this.
  • the first response message includes an identifier for updating the DU
  • the identifier of the DU may be an identifier of the identified cell ID, or other identifiers that can identify the DU, which is not limited in this application.
  • the CU-UP stops the DU1 from transmitting data.
  • the CU-UP stops the transmission of data by the DU1 at S803, which is not limited in this application.
  • this step is optional. If there is no such step, the user plane node can change the DU to perform data transmission by default, that is, when the user plane node sends the first notification message to the control plane node, the direct decision changes the DU. Data transmission is performed, or the user plane node sends the first notification message to the control panel node and also sends the DU information of the decision change to the control panel node, thereby informing the control panel node that the DU of the data transmission is replaced.
  • the control plane node sends, to the third network node, fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate a result of the terminal device replacing the network node.
  • the CU-CP After the CU-CP determines to perform the uplink/downlink data transmission, the CU-CP sends a fifth indication message to the DU2, where the fifth indication message is used to inform the UE of the result of replacing the DU.
  • the fifth indication information may be transmitted through the F1 interface message. .
  • the third network node sends the fifth indication information to the terminal device, where the terminal device receives the fifth indication information sent by the third network node.
  • the CU-CP sends the result of the replacement of the DU to the UE through the F1 AP message (for example, the DL RRC message transfer message) (as notified to the UE by the DU2), for example, the uplink data is transmitted from the DU2.
  • the F1 AP message for example, the DL RRC message transfer message
  • the uplink data is transmitted from the DU2.
  • the CU-CP may decide that the source DU1 continues to transmit downlink data, and the DU2 performs uplink data transmission. At this time, the CU-CP needs to This decision informs the UE, that is, the DU that instructs the UE to perform uplink transmission, so that the UE knows the direction of the uplink and downlink data.
  • the CU-CP may decide that all uplink and downlink data are transmitted from the DU2. At this time, the CU-CP needs to inform the UE of the decision, that is, The UE is instructed to perform uplink or downlink transmission, so that the UE knows the direction of the uplink and downlink data.
  • the fifth indication message is sent to the UE by using an RRC message by using the CU-CP.
  • the indication may be an identifier of the uplink transmission DU, an identifier of the uplink transmission cell, and an uplink transmission cell group ( At least one of the identification of the SCG and the identifier of the uplink transmission SCG is not limited in this application.
  • the user plane node sends data to the third network node, where the third network node receives data sent by the user plane node.
  • the CU-UP starts transmitting new PDU data or retransmitted PDU data to the DU2, and transmits it to the UE through the DU2.
  • the first network node sends a second notification message to the user plane node.
  • the second notification message (for example, the radio link resume radio link resume notification message) is sent to the CU-UP, and the CU-UP receives the second notification message sent by the DU1.
  • the second notification message is sent through the F1-U user plane interface, similar to the radio link outage notification.
  • the message of the F1-U interface is a DDDS (DL DATA DELIVERY STATUS) PDU, which is part of the DLDS (DL DATA DELIVERY STATUS) PDU, or may be part of other existing PDUs, or a newly defined PDU. , or a part of the newly defined PDU, which is not limited in this application.
  • the message includes the cause value of the uplink/downlink radio link resume, or other existing messages of the F1-U interface, or a new message, which is not limited in this application.
  • the user plane node sends the second notification message to the control plane node, where the control plane node receives the second notification message sent by the user plane node.
  • the CU-UP forwards the second notification message to the CU-CP through the E1 interface, so that the CP determines whether to restore the DU of the data transmission.
  • the read cause value is learned that the radio link of the DU is restored, and the CU-UP carries the information in the E1 AP interface message and sends the message to the CU-CP. .
  • the E1 AP message may be a UE bearer setup/modification/release request/response message or a UE bearer modification required/confirm message, etc., or may be an existing E1 AP other message, or a new message, this application There is no limit to this.
  • the CU-UP stops the DU2 from transmitting data, or the CU-UP stops the DU2 from transmitting data at S810, which is not limited in this application.
  • the control plane node sends a second response message to the user plane node, where the user plane node receives the second response message sent by the control plane node.
  • the second response message is sent to the CU-UP, and the CU-UP receives the second response message sent by the CU-CP, that is, the result of the UP decision (such as restoring the DU, the identifier of the DU, etc.),
  • the second response message can be sent through the E1 AP interface message.
  • the E1 AP message may be a UE bearer setup/modification/release request/response message or a UE bearer modification required/confirm message, or may be an existing E1 AP other message or a new message. There is no limit to this.
  • the second response message includes the identifier of the restored DU, and the identifier of the DU may be the identifier of the identified cell, or other identifiers that can identify the DU. Alternatively, it may directly be a recovery indication, that is, the UP stores the source DU in advance, and upon receiving the recovery indication, it can know which DU is to be transmitted.
  • this step is optional. If there is no such step, the user plane node can decide to restore the DU for data transmission by default, that is, when the user plane node sends the first notification message to the control plane node, the direct decision recovery DU is performed. Data transmission is performed, or the user plane node sends the first notification message to the control panel node, and also sends the decision recovery DU information to the control panel node, thereby informing the control panel node to restore the DU of the data transmission.
  • the user plane node sends data to the first network node, where the first network node receives data sent by the user plane node.
  • the new PDU is transmitted or the retransmitted PDU is transmitted to the UE through the DU1.
  • the CU-UP can decide to restore the uplink and downlink data transmission of the DU1.
  • control panel node may further notify the UE that the data transmission node is restored to the first network node by using the third network node or the first network node.
  • the determination of the radio link problem of the DU belongs to the implementation of the DU.
  • the indication is sent to the CU through the interface between the DU and the CU.
  • the DU may send the wireless link problem through a user plane or a control plane protocol.
  • the CU determines whether to replace the DU. If the DU is replaced, the CU performs the data transmission with the UE through the new DU.
  • the indication problem of the radio link problem in the CU-DU architecture is solved, and the prior art cannot solve the indication of the radio link problem in the CP-UP architecture.
  • the embodiment of the present application mainly solves the problem in the CP- Under the UP architecture, the CP obtains a method for wireless link failure/recovery.
  • the method of wireless communication in the embodiment of the present application helps to solve the problem of indicating the failure/recovery of the wireless link in the CP-UP architecture.
  • the transmission method 800 of the embodiment of the present application is described above with reference to FIG. 15.
  • the radio link failure indication in FIG. 15 is transmitted through the F1-U user plane interface.
  • the transmission method 900 according to the embodiment of the present application is described in detail below with reference to FIG.
  • the radio link failure indication in the method 900 can be transmitted through the F1-C control plane interface. If the radio link problem indication is a process of transmission through the F1-C control plane interface, the DU can pass the F1 AP message (for example, UE context setup /modification/release request/response/required/confirm message, etc.) transmitting the indication to the CU-CP, as shown in FIG. 16, the method 900 includes:
  • the terminal device is connected to the first network node and the third network node and can transmit/receive data from the first network node and the third network node.
  • the UE is connected to DU1 and DU2 and can transmit/receive data from DU1 and DU2.
  • the first network node finds that there is a problem with its own wireless link.
  • DU1 finds a problem with its own wireless link.
  • S901-S902 is similar to the S801-S802 process, and is not described herein for brevity.
  • the first network node sends a first notification message to the control plane node, where the control plane node receives the first notification message sent by the first network node.
  • the DU1 sends a first notification message (radio link outage notification message) to the CU-CP through the F1-C interface, and the CU-CP receives the first notification message from the DU1 through the F1-C interface.
  • a first notification message radio link outage notification message
  • the present application does not limit the F1 AP message, such as the UE context setup/modification request/response/required message, or other existing F1 AP messages, or new messages.
  • the CU-CP determines that the replaced DU2 has not allocated the relevant resources for the UE (that is, the scenario 1 described above), the CU-CP needs to initiate a process for establishing a bearer to the DU2, specifically:
  • the CU-CP sends an F1 AP message UE context setup/modification request to the DU2, and requests the DU2 to establish a related bearer to be transmitted. After receiving the message, the DU2 responds to the F1 AP UE context setup/modification response to the CU-CP.
  • the control plane node sends data to the third network node, where the third network node receives data sent by the control plane node.
  • the CU-CP starts transmitting new PDU data or retransmitted PDU data to the DU2, and transmits it to the UE through the DU2.
  • the first network node sends a second notification message to the control plane node.
  • the second notification message (radio link resume notification message) is sent to the CU-CP, and the CU-CP receives the second notification message sent by the DU1.
  • the control plane node sends data to the first network node, where the first network node receives data sent by the control plane node.
  • the new PDU or the retransmitted PDU is transmitted through the DU1.
  • the CU-CP determines to restore the uplink and downlink data transmission of the DU1.
  • the transmission method 1000 of the embodiment of the present application is described below with reference to FIG. 17.
  • the transmission method 1000 is mainly for a scenario in which the UE changes from the source UP to the target UP due to the movement of the UE under the architecture of the CP-UP.
  • the source UP may cache some data coming from the core network. Therefore, the cached data needs to be sent from the source UP to the target UP during the handover process, that is, the UP needs to establish a user plane channel. Data forwarding.
  • the embodiments of the present application are mainly directed to the following scenarios:
  • Scene 1 The CP has not changed during the UP change.
  • the CP decides to switch UP, and decides to forward the data (such as asking the source UP in advance whether there is cached data, or the source UP periodically reports the cached data), and sends an indication to the target UP (the displayed data forwarding indication is required, or hidden)
  • the switching status indication indicates that the target UP allocates a data forwarding address (the data forwarding address may be a PDU session granularity and/or a DRB granularity, and may be an uplink/downlink data forwarding address, which is not limited herein);
  • the target UP sends the allocated data forwarding address to the source UP through the CP;
  • the source UP forwards data to the buffered data according to the data forwarding address.
  • the source CP determines to perform the switch UP, and decides to perform data forwarding (such as asking the source UP in advance whether there is cached data, or the source UP periodically reports the cached data), and sends an indication to the target UP through the target CP (displayed data forwarding required)
  • the indication, or the implicit handover status indication indicating that the target UP allocates a data forwarding address (the data forwarding address may be a PDU session granularity and/or a DRB granularity, and may be an uplink/downlink data forwarding address, which is not limited in the present invention);
  • the target UP sends the assigned data forwarding address to the source UP through the target CP and the source CP.
  • the source UP forwards data to the buffered data according to the data forwarding address.
  • FIG. 17 shows a schematic flowchart of a transmission method 1000 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 17, the method 1000 includes:
  • the control plane node triggers a change of the user plane node.
  • the CP triggers a change in UP.
  • how the control plane node triggers the user plane node change belongs to the implementation, which is not limited herein.
  • S1002 The control plane node sends a handover request message to the source user plane node, and the source user plane node receives the handover request message sent by the control plane node.
  • the CP sends a handover request message to the source UP, and the source UP receives the handover request message sent by the CP.
  • S1003 A handover request response message sent by the source user plane node to the control plane node, where the control plane node receives a handover request response message sent by the source user plane node.
  • the source UP sends a handover request response message to the CP, and the CP receives the handover request response message sent by the source UP.
  • the CP first initiates a handover request message to the source UP, where the handover request message carries a request for a data state (such as a cached data state), and the source UP receives the response CP, and if the UP has a cache, the data may be forwarded. , carrying a data forwarding indication to the CP.
  • a data state such as a cached data state
  • S1002-S1003 is optional, and the handover request initiated by the CP to the UP may be an existing E1 AP message, and the message name is not limited, such as a bearer modification/setup/release request/response/required/confirm message, or Other existing E1 AP messages, or new messages, are not limited in this application.
  • the two steps S1002 and S1003 can be replaced by one step, that is, the source user plane node directly sends status information to the control plane node, and the status information is, for example, data cache information, and the control plane node considers that it can be triggered after receiving the information. Data forwarding.
  • the status information may be triggered periodically or by an event, and the present application is not limited herein.
  • S1004 The control plane node sends sixth indication information to the target user plane node, where the target user plane node receives the sixth indication information sent by the control plane node.
  • the CP sends the sixth indication information to the target UP, and the target UP receives the sixth indication information sent by the CP, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate that the source UP is to perform data forwarding, that is, the target UP is allocated a data forwarding for the source UP. address.
  • the sixth indication information may be carried in an existing E1 AP message, such as a bearer modification/setup/release request/response/required/confirm message, or other existing E1AP message, or a new message, this The application does not impose any restrictions on this.
  • the sixth indication information may be a displayed data forwarding indication (eg, data forwarding indication, which may be uplink or downlink), or may be an implicit indication (eg, HO status, HO, etc., that is, the target is notified)
  • the message of the UP is triggered by the UP handover, which is not triggered by the initial access of the UE, or may be implicitly indicated by the information carrying the specific PDU session or the DRB, or may be the data carrying the specific PDU session or the DRB.
  • the forwarding indication (for example, the data forwarding indication of the DRB ID1, the data forwarding indication of the PDU session 1, that is, the target UP only allocates a data forwarding address for the DRB or the PDU session, and the source UP only forwards the DRB or the PDU. Session data).
  • the target user plane node allocates a data forwarding address, and sends the data forwarding address to the control plane node.
  • the target UP allocates a data forwarding address and sends the data forwarding address to the CP.
  • the data forwarding address may be PDU session granularity and/or DRB granularity, and may be an uplink/downlink data forwarding address, for example, DL/UL Forwarding GTP Tunnel Endpoint, PDU Session level DL data forwarding GTP-U Tunnel Endpoint, this application does not limit this.
  • S1006 The control plane node forwards the data forwarding address to the source user plane node.
  • the CP after receiving the data forwarding address, the CP sends the source UP.
  • the data forwarding address may be carried in an existing E1 AP message, such as a bearer modification/setup/release request/response/required/confirm message, or other existing E1AP message, or a new message. This application does not limit this.
  • the method 1000 further includes performing a modification between the CU and the DU by using an F1AP message; performing a SN (sequence number serial number) transfer process between the CP and the target UP, the CP, and the source UP; and forwarding the data in the source UP and The target is executed between the UPs; the CP and the core network perform the path update process.
  • SN sequence number serial number
  • the target CP may send the data forwarding address to the source CP, and the source CP sends the data forwarding address to the source CP.
  • the source is UP.
  • the target CP sends the data forwarding address through an interface with the source CP, such as an Xn interface, an X2 interface, or other existing or new interfaces, which is not limited herein.
  • the target CP indicates that the target UP allocates a data forwarding address, where the data forwarding indication of the target CP may be triggered by itself, or may be triggered by the source CP, that is, after the source CP triggers data forwarding, the source
  • the CP sends the data forwarding indication to the target CP (for example, indicated by the Xn interface or the X2 interface), and the target CP indicates the target UP to allocate the data forwarding address, wherein the method for assigning the data forwarding address to the target UP is similar to the scenario 1, where No longer.
  • the data forwarding address is similar to the scenario 1 and is not described here.
  • FIG. 18 shows a schematic block diagram of a network device 1100 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 18, the network device 1100 includes:
  • the processing module 1110 is configured to control the transceiver module 1120 to receive first indication information from the second network node, where the first indication information is used to indicate an effective area of each system information in the at least one system information;
  • the transceiver module 1120 is further configured to send the at least one system information and the first indication information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device learns the effective area to which the at least one system information is applied.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive first configuration information from the second network node, where the first configuration information includes at least one system information block, scheduling information of the at least one system information block, and the at least one system.
  • the first configuration information includes at least one system information block, scheduling information of the at least one system information block, and the at least one system.
  • the processing module 1110 is further configured to determine second configuration information, where the second configuration information is used by the first network node to send the at least one system information, where the second configuration information includes at least one system information. At least one of a window length of the system information, scheduling information of the at least one system information block, a mapping relationship between the at least one system information and the at least one system information block, and a scheduling period of each system information in the at least one system information .
  • the scheduling information of the at least one system information block includes a scheduling period of each system information block in the at least one system information block, a warning area list of each system information block in the at least one system information block, and the at least one system At least one of the number of broadcasts of each system information block in the message.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive closed user group CSG indication information and CSG identification information from the second network node, where the CSG indication information is used to indicate that the cell in which the terminal device is located is a CSG cell, or The CSG indication information is used to indicate that the cell in which the terminal device is located is not a CSG cell.
  • the network device includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function; and/or
  • the second network node includes at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • FIG. 19 shows a schematic block diagram of a network device 1200 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 19, the network device 1200 includes:
  • the processing module 1210 is configured to determine an effective area of each system information in the at least one system information
  • the transceiver module 1220 is configured to send first indication information to the first network node, where the first indication information is used to indicate an effective area of each system information in the at least one system information.
  • the transceiver module 1220 is further configured to send, to the first network node, first configuration information, where the first configuration information includes at least one system information block, scheduling information of the at least one system information block, and the at least one system information. a mapping relationship with at least one system information block, at least one of a scheduling period of each system information in the at least one system information.
  • the scheduling information of the at least one system information block includes a scheduling period of each system information block in the at least one system information block, a warning area list of each system information block in the at least one system information block, and the at least one system At least one of the number of broadcasts of each system information block in the message.
  • the processing module 1210 is further configured to determine CSG indication information and CSG identification information, where the CSG indication information is used to indicate that the cell in which the terminal device is located is a CSG cell, or the CSG indication information is used to indicate the terminal device The cell is not a CSG cell;
  • the transceiver module 1220 is further configured to send the CSG indication information and the CSG identification information to the first network node.
  • the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function; and/or
  • the second network node includes at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic block diagram of a terminal device 1300 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 20, the terminal device 1300 includes:
  • the transceiver module 1310 receives at least one system information and first indication information from the first network node, where the first indication information is used to indicate an effective area of each system information in the at least one system information;
  • the processing module 1320 is configured to determine, according to the first indication information, an effective area to which the at least one system information is applied.
  • the transceiver module 1310 is further configured to receive the closed user group CSG indication information and the CSG identification information from the first network node, where the CSG indication information is used to indicate that the cell in which the terminal device is located is a CSG cell, or The CSG indication information is used to indicate that the cell in which the terminal device is located is not a CSG cell.
  • the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function.
  • FIG. 21 shows a schematic block diagram of a network device 1400 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 1400 includes:
  • the processing module 1410 is configured to determine that the terminal device uses the first message request system information or the system information block, where the first message is a random access first message or a random access third message, and the first network node includes a wireless link layer Controlling at least one of a protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function;
  • the transceiver module 1420 is configured to send third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device requests the system information or the system information block by using the first message.
  • the first message is a random access first message
  • the third indication information is further used to indicate a mapping relationship between the at least one system information and the random access preamble sequence.
  • the first message is a random access third message
  • the transceiver module 1120 is further configured to receive at least one of system information request response information and conflict resolution identifier information from the second network node.
  • the first message is a random access third message
  • the transceiver module 1120 is further configured to receive bitmap indication information from the second network node, where the bitmap indication information is used to indicate to be sent to the terminal device.
  • the transceiver module 1420 is further configured to send a MAC CE to the terminal device, where the MAC CE includes the bitmap indication information;
  • the transceiver module 1420 forwards the bitmap indication information sent by the second network node to the terminal device, where the bitmap indication information is used to indicate system information or a system information block sent to the terminal device.
  • FIG. 22 shows a schematic block diagram of a network device 1500 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 1500 includes:
  • the processing module 1510 is configured to determine that the terminal device uses the first message request system information or the system information block, where the first message is a random access first message or a random access third message;
  • the transceiver module 1520 is configured to send the third indication information to the first network node, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the first network node sends fourth indication information to the terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the terminal
  • the device requests the system information or the system information block by using the first message
  • the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function; and/or
  • the second network node includes at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • the first message is a random access first message
  • the third indication information is further used to indicate a mapping relationship between the at least one system information and the random access preamble sequence.
  • the first message is a random access first message
  • the fourth indication information is further used to indicate a mapping relationship between the at least one system information and the random access preamble sequence.
  • the first message is a random access third message
  • the third indication information is further used by the first network node to indicate to the terminal device that the system information is requested by using the random access third message, or
  • the three indication information is used by the first network node to indicate to the terminal device that the system information block is requested by using the random access third message.
  • the first message is a random access third message
  • the transceiver module 1520 is further configured to send a system information request response to the first network node, where the system information request response includes system information request response information and conflict resolution. At least one of identification information;
  • the transceiver module 1520 is further configured to send a system information request response to the terminal device by using the first network node, where the system information request response includes at least one of system information request response information and conflict resolution identifier information.
  • the first message is a random access third message
  • the transceiver module 1520 is further configured to send, to the first network node, bitmap indication information, where the bitmap indication information is used to indicate system information that is sent to the terminal device;
  • the transceiver module 1520 is further configured to send, by using the first network node, bitmap indication information to the terminal device, where the bitmap indication information is used to indicate system information or a system information block sent to the terminal device.
  • FIG. 23 shows a schematic block diagram of a network device 1600 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 1600 includes:
  • the processing module 1610 is configured to generate resource state information, where the resource state information includes at least one of a physical resource block, a hardware load, and an almost blank subframe;
  • the transceiver module 1620 is configured to send the resource status information to the second network node.
  • the network device includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function; and/or
  • the second network node includes at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • the transceiver module 1620 is further configured to receive a resource status request message sent by the second network node, where the resource status request message is used to request the resource status information.
  • the transceiver module 1620 is further configured to receive the resource status information of the third network node from the second network node.
  • FIG. 24 shows a schematic block diagram of a network device 1700 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 1700 includes:
  • the transceiver module 1710 receives first resource state information from the first network node, where the first resource state information includes at least one of a physical resource block, a hardware load, and an almost blank subframe;
  • the processing module 1720 is configured to control the transceiver module 1710 to send the second resource state information to the third network node, where the second resource state information includes a physical resource block, a hardware load, an almost blank subframe, a transport network layer load, an available capacity, and a reference. At least one of a signal receiving power measurement report and a channel state information report;
  • the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function; and/or
  • the second network node includes at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • the transceiver module 1710 is further configured to receive second resource status request information sent by the third network node, where the second resource request information is used to request the second resource status information;
  • the transceiver module 1710 is further configured to send, to the first network node, first resource status request information, where the second resource status request information is used to request the first resource status information;
  • the transceiver module 1710 is further configured to receive a measurement result from the first network node, where the measurement result includes at least one of a physical resource block, a hardware load, and an almost blank subframe.
  • the transceiver module 1710 is further configured to:
  • FIG. 25 shows a schematic block diagram of a network device 1800 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 1800 includes:
  • the processing module 1810 is configured to generate a second message, where the second message includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device requests system information, or the fourth indication information is used to indicate the terminal device. Request to establish an RRC connection;
  • the processing module 1810 is configured to generate a second message, where the second message is carried on a first logical channel or a second logical channel, where the first logical channel is used to carry a message requesting system information, and the second logical channel is used to Carrying a message requesting an RRC connection;
  • the processing module 1810 is configured to generate a second message, where the second message uses a first logical channel identifier or a second logical channel identifier, where the first logical channel identifier is used to identify a message requesting system information, the second logical channel Identifying a message identifying the requesting RRC connection;
  • the transceiver module 1820 is configured to send the second message to the first network node, where the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function.
  • the fourth indication information is included in a message header of the fourth message, where the message header may be a MAC layer header or an RLC layer header; or
  • the fourth indication information is message type information
  • FIG. 26 shows a schematic block diagram of a network device 1900 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 1900 includes:
  • the transceiver module 1910 receives a second message from the terminal device, where the second message includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device requests system information or a system information block, or the fourth indication information is used by the Instructing the terminal device to request to establish an RRC connection, where the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function;
  • the transceiver module 1910 is configured to receive a second message on the first logical channel or the second logical channel, where the message carried on the first logical channel is used to request system information, and the message carried by the second logical channel is used for requesting Establish an RRC connection;
  • the transceiver module 1910 is configured to receive a second message from the terminal device, where the second message uses a first logical channel identifier, or the second message uses a second logical channel identifier;
  • the processing module 1920 is configured to generate a third message, where the third message includes a first container of the second message, where the message type information of the first container indicates that the terminal device needs the requested system information;
  • the transceiver module 1910 is further configured to send a third message to the second network node, where the third message includes a first container, where information in the first container indicates that the terminal device needs to request system information or a system information block, the second
  • the network node includes at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • FIG. 27 shows a schematic block diagram of a network device 2000 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 2000 includes:
  • the transceiver module 2010 is configured to receive a third message from the first network node, where the third message is used to request to establish an RRC connection, where the third message is determined according to the information of the first container in the third message. ;
  • the processing module 2020 is configured to determine that the information in the first container indicates that the terminal device needs to establish an RRC connection
  • the processing module 2020 is further configured to determine that the third message does not include a second container, where the second container is an RRC container of the first network node to the second network node;
  • the transceiver module 2010 is further configured to send the reject indication information to the terminal device by using the first network node, where the reject indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device is denied to establish an RRC connection.
  • the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function; and/or
  • the network device 2000 includes at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • FIG. 28 shows a schematic block diagram of a network device 2100 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device 2100 includes:
  • the transceiver module 2110 is configured to receive a third message from the first network node, where the third message is used to request system information or a system information block, where the third message is based on the first container in the third message Information determined;
  • the processing module 2120 is configured to determine that the information of the first container indicates that the terminal device needs to request system information or a system information block;
  • the transceiver module 2110 is further configured to send system information request response information or bitmap indication information to the terminal device by using the first network node, where the bitmap indication information is used to indicate system information or a system information block sent to the terminal device.
  • the first network node includes at least one of a radio link layer control protocol layer, a medium access control layer, and a physical layer function; and/or
  • the network device includes at least one of a radio resource control protocol layer, a service data adaptation layer, and a packet data convergence protocol layer.
  • the program instructions can be executed by a hardware platform having a processor and a communication interface to implement the functions involved in any of the foregoing embodiments of the present application, based on this, As shown in FIG. 29, the embodiment of the present application provides a schematic block diagram of a communication device 2200, where the communication device 2200 includes:
  • At least one processor 2201 optionally including a communication interface 2202 for supporting communication interaction between the communication device 2200 and other devices; when the program instructions are executed in the at least one processor 2201, the foregoing embodiment of the present application
  • the functionality of any of the devices operating on any of the following devices is implemented: a terminal device, a first network node and a second network node, or a UE, a DU (eg, an eNB-DU or a gNB-DU), and a CU (eg, eNB-CU or gNB-CU).
  • the communication device 2200 can also include a memory 2203 for storing program instructions necessary for implementing the functions of the above devices or process data generated during program execution.
  • the communication device 2200 may further include an internal interconnection line to implement communication interaction between the at least one processor 2201, the communication interface 2202, and the memory 2203.
  • the at least one processor 2201 can be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processor, or a general purpose chip.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a chip system, which is applied to a network device, where the chip system includes: at least one processor, at least one memory, and an interface circuit, where the interface circuit is responsible for information interaction between the chip system and the outside world.
  • the at least one memory, the interface circuit, and the at least one processor are interconnected by a line, the at least one memory storing instructions; the instructions being executed by the at least one processor to perform the various aspects described above The operation of the first network node or the second network node in the method described.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a chip system, which is applied to a terminal device, where the chip system includes: at least one processor, at least one memory, and an interface circuit, where the interface circuit is responsible for information interaction between the chip system and the outside world.
  • the at least one memory, the interface circuit, and the at least one processor are interconnected by a line, the at least one memory storing instructions; the instructions being executed by the at least one processor to perform the various aspects described above The operation of the terminal device in the method described.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, including: a network device, and/or a terminal device; wherein the network device is the network device described in the foregoing aspects.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, which is applied to a network device, where the computer program product includes a series of instructions, when the instruction is executed, to perform the method described in the above aspects.
  • the processor may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities.
  • each step of the foregoing method embodiment may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in a processor or an instruction in a form of software.
  • the processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), or the like. Programming logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
  • the general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented by the hardware decoding processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and combines the hardware to complete the steps of the above method.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), or an electric Erase programmable read only memory (EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory can be a Random Access Memory (RAM) that acts as an external cache.
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (Synchronous DRAM).
  • SDRAM Double Data Rate SDRAM
  • DDR SDRAM Double Data Rate SDRAM
  • ESDRAM Enhanced Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory
  • SLDRAM Synchronous Connection Dynamic Random Access Memory
  • DR RAM direct memory bus random access memory
  • system and “network” are used interchangeably herein.
  • the term “and/or” in this context is merely an association describing the associated object, indicating that there may be three relationships, for example, A and / or B, which may indicate that A exists separately, and both A and B exist, respectively. B these three situations.
  • the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the contextual object is an "or" relationship.
  • B corresponding to A means that B is associated with A, and B can be determined according to A.
  • determining B from A does not mean that B is only determined based on A, and that B can also be determined based on A and/or other information.
  • the computer program product can include one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transfer to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber (DSL), or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that includes one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic disk), an optical medium (eg, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (SSD)).
  • the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other manners.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of the unit is only a logical function division.
  • there may be another division manner for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions may be stored in a computer readable storage medium if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product.
  • the technical solution of the present application which is essential or contributes to the prior art, or a part of the technical solution, may be embodied in the form of a software product, which is stored in a storage medium, including
  • the instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present application.
  • the foregoing storage medium includes various media that can store program codes, such as a USB flash drive, a mobile hard disk, a read only memory, a random access memory, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种传输方法和网络设备，该传输方法包括：第一网络节点接收来自于第二网络节点的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域；该第一网络节点向终端设备发送该至少一个系统信息和该第一指示信息，以便于该终端设备获知该至少一个系统信息所应用的有效区域。本申请实施例的传输方法，有助于解决将系统信息的有效区域指示给终端设备的问题。

Description

一种传输方法和网络设备
本申请要求于2018年1月12日提交中国专利局、申请号为201810032038.5、申请名称为“一种传输方法和网络设备”的中国专利申请的优先权以及要求于2018年4月4日提交中国专利局、申请号为201810296172.6、申请名称为“一种传输方法和网络设备”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，并且更具体地，涉及一种传输方法和网络设备。
背景技术
新的接入技术例如5G(New Radio，NR)技术中，定义了一种最小系统信息(Minimum System Information，MSI)，该MSI可以提供小区内可用的其他系统信息(other SIs)，NR在广播系统信息时，该MSI中的other SIs不是一定会广播，终端设备通过检查收到的调度信息来判断所需要的系统消息块(System Information Block，SIB)是否已经广播了。对于没有广播的SI，终端设备可以向基站请求获取SI。
在NR中，基站可以由集中式单元(Centralized Unit,CU)和分布式单元(Distributed Unit,DU)构成，即对原接入网中的基站的功能进行拆分，将基站的部分功能部署在一个CU，将剩余功能部署在多个DU，多个DU共用一个CU，可以节省成本，以及易于网络扩展。
目前标准上NR CU-DU架构下的DU在广播系统信息可以向终端设备指示系统信息的有效区域标识(area ID)，当终端设备移动到新的有效区域时，会读到新的有效区域标识，若果有效区域标识没有变化就不用重新读系统信息了。如何将系统信息的有效区域指示给终端设备成为了一个亟待解决的问题。
发明内容
本申请提供一种传输方法和网络设备，通过第二网络节点确定系统信息的有效区域，有助于解决将系统信息的有效区域指示给终端设备的问题。
第一方面，提供了一种传输方法，该方法包括：第一网络节点接收来自于第二网络节点的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域；该第一网络节点向终端设备发送该至少一个系统信息和该第一指示信息，以便于该终端设备获知该至少一个系统信息所应用的有效区域。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该至少一个系统信息的有效区域为小区粒度或者基站粒度。
本申请实施例的传输方法，通过第二网络节点确定系统信息的有效区域，有助于解决将系统信息的有效区域指示给终端设备的问题。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该第一网络节点接收来自于该第二网络节点的第一配置信息，该第一配置信息包括至少一个系统信息块、该至少一个系统信息块的调度信息、该至少一个系统信息和该至少一个系统信息块的映射关系、该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的调度周期中的至少一种。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该第一指示信息和该第一配置信息可以在两个信元中由该第二网络节点分别指示给该第一网络节点，也可以在同一个信元由该第二网络节点指示给该第一网络节点。
本申请实施例的传输方法，通过第一网络节点接收第二网络节点系统信息的配置信息，有助于第一网络节点确定最终该至少一个系统信息的配置信息，从而将系统信息广播给终端设备。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该第一网络节点确定第二配置信息，该第二配置信息用于该第一网络节点发送该至少一个系统信息所使用，该第二配置信息包括至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的窗口长度、该至少一个系统信息块的调度信息、该至少一个系统信息和至少一个系统信息块的映射关系、该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的调度周期中的至少一种。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该至少一个系统信息块的调度信息包括至少一个系统信息块中每个系统信息块的调度周期，该至少一个系统信息块中每个系统信息块的警示区域列表和该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息块的广播次数中的至少一种。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该第一网络节点接收来自于该第二网络节点的封闭用户群(Closed Subscriber Group，CSG)指示信息和CSG标识信息，该CSG指示信息用于指示该终端设备所处小区是CSG小区，或者，该CSG指示信息用于指示该终端设备所处小区不是CSG小区。
本申请实施例的传输方法，通过第二网络节点确定CSG指示信息，有助于终端设备确定该终端设备所处的小区是否为CSG小区。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该至少一个系统信息中的至少部分系统信息有更新时，该方法还包括：该第一网络节点接收来自于该第二网络节点的第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示所述至少部分系统信息、所述至少部分系统信息中的系统信息块、所述至少部分系统信息的有效区域中的至少一种。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该有效区域指示区域级别时，该第一指示信息包括区域标识area ID。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该有效区域指示区域级别和小区级别时，该第一指示信息包括area ID和位图信息bitmap。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或该第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该第一网络节点的协议栈架构为无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该第二网络节点的协议栈架构为无线资源控制协议层、业 务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该第一网络节点为DU，该第二网络节点为CU。
本申请实施例的传输方法，适用于NR CU-DU架构下，同时也适用于其他技术领域，例如类似长期演进技术(Long Term Evolution，LTE)和其他制式协作的场景。
第二方面，提供了一种传输方法，该方法包括：第二网络节点确定至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域；该第二网络节点向第一网络节点发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点发送第一配置信息，该第一配置信息包括至少一个系统信息块、该至少一个系统信息块的调度信息、该至少一个系统信息和至少一个系统信息块的映射关系、该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的调度周期中的至少一种。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该至少一个系统信息块的调度信息包括至少一个系统信息块中每个系统信息块的调度周期，该至少一个系统信息块中每个系统信息块的警示区域列表和该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息块的广播次数中的至少一种。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该第二网络节点确定CSG指示信息和CSG标识信息，该CSG指示信息用于指示该终端设备所处小区是CSG小区，或者，该CSG指示信息用于指示该终端设备所处小区不是CSG小区；该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点发送该CSG指示信息和该CSG标识信息。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该至少一个系统信息中的至少部分系统信息有更新时，该方法还包括：该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示所述至少部分系统信息、所述至少部分系统信息中的系统信息块、所述至少部分系统信息的有效区域中的至少一种。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或该第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该第一网络节点的协议栈架构为无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该第二网络节点的协议栈架构为无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
第三方面，提供了一种传输方法，该方法包括：终端设备接收来自于第一网络节点的至少一个系统信息和第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域；该终端设备根据该第一指示信息，确定该至少一个系统信息所应用的有效区域。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该终端设备接收来自于该第一网络节点的封闭用户群CSG指示信息和CSG标识信息，该CSG指示信息用于指示该终端设备所处小区是CSG小区，或者，该CSG指示信息用于指示该终端设备所处小区不是CSG小区。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该第一网络节点包括无线链路 层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该第一网络节点的协议栈架构为无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该第二网络节点的协议栈架构为无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
第四方面，一种传输方法，该方法包括：第一网络节点确定终端设备使用第一消息请求系统信息或系统信息块，该第一消息为随机接入第一消息或者随机接入第三消息，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；该第一网络节点向该终端设备发送第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示该终端设备使用该第一消息请求系统信息或系统信息块；其中，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该第一网络节点的协议栈架构为无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种。
本申请实施例的传输方法，通过第一网络节点确定终端设备使用第一消息请求系统信息或系统信息块，有助于终端设备请求系统信息或者系统信息块时明确请求方式。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该第一消息为随机接入第一消息，该第三指示信息还用于指示至少一个系统信息和随机接入前导序列的映射关系。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该第一消息为随机接入第三消息，该方法还包括：该第一网络节点接收来自于该第二网络节点的系统信息请求响应信息和冲突解决标识信息中的至少一种。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该第一消息为随机接入第三消息，该方法还包括：该第一网络节点接收来自于该第二网络节点的bitmap指示信息，该bitmap指示信息用于指示发送给终端设备的系统信息或者系统信息块；该第一网络节点向该终端设备发送MAC CE，该MAC CE包括该bitmap指示信息；或者，该第一网络节点转发该第二网络节点发送的bitmap指示给该终端设备，该bitmap指示用于指示发送给该终端设备的系统信息或者系统信息块。
本申请实施例的传输方法，通过该第一网络节点向终端设备指示系统信息和随机接入前导序列的映射关系，有助于解决终端设备请求系统信息或者系统信息块时明确请求方式。
第五方面，提供了一种传输方法，该方法包括：第二网络节点确定终端设备使用第一消息请求系统信息或系统信息块，该第一消息为随机接入第一消息或者随机接入第三消息；该第二网络节点向第一网络节点发送第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示该第一网络节点向该终端设备发送第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备使用该第一消息请求系统信息或系统信息块；其中，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或该第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该第一网络节点的协议栈架构为无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该第二网络节点的协议栈架构为无线资源控制协议层、业 务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
本申请实施例的传输方法，通过第二网络节点确定终端设备使用第一消息请求系统信息或系统信息块，有助于解决终端设备请求系统信息或者系统信息块时明确请求方式。
结合第五方面，在第五方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该第一消息为随机接入第一消息，该第三指示信息还用于指示至少一个系统信息和随机接入前导序列的映射关系。
本申请实施例的传输方法，通过该第二网络节点向终端设备指示系统信息和随机接入前导序列的映射关系，有助于解决终端设备请求系统信息或者系统信息块时明确请求方式。
结合第五方面，在第五方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该第一消息为随机接入第一消息，该第四指示信息还用于指示至少一个系统信息和随机接入前导序列的映射关系。
本申请实施例的传输方法，通过该第一网络节点向终端设备指示系统信息和随机接入前导序列的映射关系，有助于解决终端设备请求系统信息或者系统信息块时明确请求方式。
结合第五方面，在第五方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该第一消息为随机接入第三消息，该第三指示信息还用于该第一网络节点向该终端设备指示使用该随机接入第三消息请求系统信息，或者，该第三指示信息用于该第一网络节点向该终端设备指示使用该随机接入第三消息请求系统信息块。
结合第五方面，在第五方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该第一消息为随机接入第三消息，该方法还包括：该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点发送系统信息请求响应，该系统信息请求响应中包括系统信息请求响应信息和冲突解决标识信息中的至少一种。
结合第五方面，在第五方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该第一消息为随机接入第三消息，该方法还包括：该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点的bitmap指示信息，该bitmap指示信息用于指示发送给终端设备的系统信息；或者，该第二网络节点通过该第一网络节点向该终端设备发送bitmap指示信息，该bitmap指示信息用于指示发送给终端设备的系统信息或系统信息块。
本申请实施例的传输方法，通过该第二网络节点向终端设备指示该终端设备指示使用该随机接入第三消息请求系统信息或者系统信息块，有助于解决终端设备请求系统信息或者系统信息块时明确请求方式。
第六方面，提供了一种传输方法，该方法包括：第一网络节点向第二网络节点发送资源状态信息，该资源状态信息包括物理资源块、硬件负载和几乎空白子帧中的至少一种；其中，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或该第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该第一网络节点的协议栈架构为无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该第二网络节点的协议栈架构为无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
本申请实施例的传输方法，通过第一网络节点向第二网络节点发送资源状态信息，有助于解决网络设备之间资源状态相互请求的问题。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的某些可能的实现方式中，第一网络节点向第二网络节点发送资源状态信息之前，该方法还包括：第一网络节点接收第二网络节点发送的资源状态请求消息，该资源状态请求消息用于请求该资源状态信息。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该第一网络节点接收来自于该第二网络节点的第三网络节点的所述资源状态信息。
第七方面，提供了一种传输方法，该方法包括：第二网络节点接收来自于第一网络节点的第一资源状态信息，所述第一资源状态信息包括物理资源块、硬件负载和几乎空白子帧中的至少一种；第二网络节点向第三网络节点发送第二资源状态信息，该第二资源状态信息包括物理资源块、硬件负载、几乎空白子帧、传输网络层负载、可用容量、参考信号接收功率测量报告、信道状态信息报告中的至少一种。其中，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或该第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该第一网络节点的协议栈架构为无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该第二网络节点的协议栈架构为无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
本申请实施例的传输方法，通过第二网络节点向第三网络节点发送资源状态信息，有助于解决网络设备之间资源状态相互请求的问题。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该第二网络节点接收来自于第一网络节点的第一资源状态信息之前，该方法还包括：该第二网络节点接收该第三网络节点发送的第二资源状态请求信息，该第二资源请求信息用于请求该第二资源状态信息；该第二网络节点向第一网络节点发送第一资源状态请求信息，该第一资源状态请求消息用于请求该第一资源状态信息；该第二网络节点接收来自于该第一网络节点的测量结果，该测量结果包括物理资源块、硬件负载和几乎空白子帧中的至少一种。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该第二网络节点接收该第三网络节点发送的该第二资源状态信息；该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点发送该第一资源状态信息。
第八方面，提供了一种传输方法，该传输方法包括：终端设备生成第二消息，该第二消息中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备请求系统信息或者系统信息块，或者，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备请求建立RRC连接；或者，终端设备生成第二消息，该第二消息承载在第一逻辑信道或者第二逻辑信道，该第一逻辑信道用于承载请求系统信息或者系统信息块的消息，该第二逻辑信道用于承载请求RRC连接的消息；或者，终端设备生成第二消息，该第二消息使用第一逻辑信道标识或者第二逻辑信道标识，该第一逻辑信道标识用于识别请求系统信息的消息，该第二逻辑信道标识用于识别请求RRC连接的消息；该终端设备向第一网络节点发送该第二消息，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种。
结合第八方面，在第八方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该第四指示信息包括在第四消息的消息报头中，该消息报头可以是MAC层报头或RLC层报头；或者该第四指示信息为消息类型信息；
第九方面，提供了一种传输方法，该传输方法包括：第一网络节点接收来自于终端设备的第二消息，该第二消息包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备请求系统信息或者系统信息块，或者，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备请求建立RRC连接，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；或者，第一网络节点在第一逻辑信道或者第二逻辑信道上接收第二消息，该第一逻辑信道上承载的消息用于请求系统信息或者系统信息块，该第二逻辑信道承载的消息用于请求建立RRC连接；或者，第一网络节点接收来自于终端设备的第二消息，该第二消息使用的是第一逻辑信道标识，或者，该第二消息使用的是第二逻辑信道标识；该第一网络节点向第二网络节点发送第三消息，该第三消息包括该第二消息的第一容器，该第一容器的信息指示该终端设备需要请求的系统信息，该第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
第十方面，提供了一种传输方法，该传输方法包括：第二网络节点接收来自于第一网络节点的第三消息，该第三消息用于请求建立RRC连接，或者，该第三消息用于请求系统信息或者系统信息块，该第三消息的目的是根据该第三消息中的第一容器的信息确定的；该第二网络节点确定该第二消息不包括第二容器，该第二容器为该第一网络节点到该第二网络节点的RRC容器；该第二网络节点通过该第一网络节点向终端设备发送拒绝指示信息，该拒绝指示信息用于指示拒绝该终端设备建立RRC连接。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或该第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：第二网络节点接收来自于第一网络节点的第三消息，该第三消息用于请求系统信息或者系统信息块，该第三消息的目的是根据该第三消息中的第一容器的信息确定的；该第二网络节点确定该第一容器的信息指示该终端设备需要请求的系统信息或者系统信息块；该第二网络节点通过该第一网络节点向该终端设备发送系统信息请求响应信息或者bitmap指示信息，该bitmap指示信息用于指示发送给终端设备的系统信息或者系统信息块。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或该第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
在一些可能的实现方式中，该第一容器的信息为消息类型message type。
第十一方面，提供了一种网络设备，用于执行第一方面或第一方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。具体地，该网络设备包括用于执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法的模块。
第十二方面，提供了一种网络设备，用于执行第二方面或第二方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。具体地，该网络设备包括用于执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法的模块。
第十三方面，提供了一种终端设备，用于执行第三方面或第三方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。具体地，该终端设备包括用于执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法的模块。
第十四方面，提供了一种网络设备，用于执行第四方面或第四方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。具体地，该网络设备包括用于执行上述第四方面或第四方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法的模块。
第十五方面，提供了一种网络设备，用于执行第五方面或第五方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。具体地，该网络设备包括用于执行上述第五方面或第五方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法的模块。
第十六方面，提供了一种网络设备，用于执行第六方面或第六方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。具体地，该网络设备包括用于执行上述第六方面或第六方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法的模块。
第十七方面，提供了一种网络设备，用于执行第七方面或第七方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。具体地，该网络设备包括用于执行上述第七方面或第七方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法的模块。
第十八方面，提供了一种终端设备，用于执行第八方面或第八方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。具体地，该终端设备包括用于执行上述第八方面或第八方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法的模块。
第十九方面，提供了一种网络设备，用于执行第九方面或第九方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。具体地，该网络设备包括用于执行上述第九方面或第九方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法的模块。
第二十方面，提供了一种网络设备，用于执行第十方面或第十方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。具体地，该网络设备包括用于执行上述第十方面或第十方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法的模块。
第二十一方面，提供了一种网络设备，该网络设备包括存储器、收发器和至少一个处理器，所述存储器、所述收发器和所述至少一个处理器通过线路互联，所述收发器用于执行第一方面及第一方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述第一网络节点进行的消息收发的操作；所述至少一个处理器调用所述存储器中存储的所述指令，执行第一方面及第一方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述第一网络节点进行的处理操作。
第二十二方面，提供了一种网络设备，该网络设备包括存储器、收发器和至少一个处理器，所述存储器、所述收发器和所述至少一个处理器通过线路互联，所述收发器用于执行第二方面及第二方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述第二网络节点进行的消息收发的操作；所述至少一个处理器调用所述存储器中存储的所述指令，执行第二方面及第二方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述第二网络节点进行的处理操作。
第二十三方面，提供了一种终端设备，该终端设备包括存储器、收发器和至少一个处理器，所述存储器、所述收发器和所述至少一个处理器通过线路互联，所述收发器用于执行第三方面及第三方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述终端设备进行的消息收发的操作；所述至少一个处理器调用所述存储器中存储的所述指令，执行第三方面及第三方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述终端设备进行的处理操作。
第二十四方面，提供了一种网络设备，该网络设备包括存储器、收发器和至少一个处理器，所述存储器、所述收发器和所述至少一个处理器通过线路互联，所述收发器用于执行第四方面及第四方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述第一网络节点进行的 消息收发的操作；所述至少一个处理器调用所述存储器中存储的所述指令，执行第四方面及第四方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述第一网络节点进行的处理操作。
第二十五方面，提供了一种网络设备，该网络设备包括存储器、收发器和至少一个处理器，所述存储器、所述收发器和所述至少一个处理器通过线路互联，所述收发器用于执行第五方面及第五方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述第二网络节点进行的消息收发的操作；所述至少一个处理器调用所述存储器中存储的所述指令，执行第五方面及第五方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述第二网络节点进行的处理操作。
第二十六方面，提供了一种网络设备，该网络设备包括存储器、收发器和至少一个处理器，所述存储器、所述收发器和所述至少一个处理器通过线路互联，所述收发器用于执行第六方面及第六方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述第一网络节点进行的消息收发的操作；所述至少一个处理器调用所述存储器中存储的所述指令，执行第六方面及第六方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述第一网络节点进行的处理操作。
第二十七方面，提供了一种网络设备，该网络设备包括存储器、收发器和至少一个处理器，所述存储器、所述收发器和所述至少一个处理器通过线路互联，所述收发器用于执行第七方面及第七方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述第二网络节点进行的消息收发的操作；所述至少一个处理器调用所述存储器中存储的所述指令，执行第七方面及第七方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述第二网络节点进行的处理操作。
第二十八方面，提供了一种终端设备，该终端设备包括存储器、收发器和至少一个处理器，所述存储器、所述收发器和所述至少一个处理器通过线路互联，所述收发器用于执行第八方面及第八方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述终端设备进行的消息收发的操作；所述至少一个处理器调用所述存储器中存储的所述指令，执行第八方面及第八方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述终端设备进行的处理操作。
第二十九方面，提供了一种网络设备，该网络设备包括存储器、收发器和至少一个处理器，所述存储器、所述收发器和所述至少一个处理器通过线路互联，所述收发器用于执行第九方面及第九方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述第一网络节点进行的消息收发的操作；所述至少一个处理器调用所述存储器中存储的所述指令，执行第九方面及第九方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述第一网络节点进行的处理操作。
第三十方面，提供了一种网络设备，该网络设备包括存储器、收发器和至少一个处理器，所述存储器、所述收发器和所述至少一个处理器通过线路互联，所述收发器用于执行第十方面及第十方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述第二网络节点进行的消息收发的操作；所述至少一个处理器调用所述存储器中存储的所述指令，执行第十方面及第十方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述第二网络节点进行的处理操作。
第三十一方面，提供了一种传输方法，该方法包括：控制面节点接收用户面节点发送第五指示信息，该第五指示信息用于指示第一网络节点的无线链路故障；该控制面节点根据该第五指示信息，确定是否切换该第一网络节点；其中，该控制面节点的协议栈架构为无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种；和/或该第一网络节点的协议栈架构为无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种。
第三十二方面，提供了一种传输方法，该方法包括：用户面节点向控制面节点发送第 五指示信息，该第五指示信息用于指示第一网络节点的无线链路故障；其中，该用户面节点的协议栈架构为无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种；和/或该第一网络节点的协议栈架构为无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种。
结合第三十二方面，在第三十二方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该用户面节点接收该第一网络节点发送的用户面接口消息，该用户面接口消息用于指示该第一网络节点的无线链路故障。
第三十三方面，提供了一种传输方法，该方法包括：第一控制面节点向第一用户面节点发送第六指示信息，该第六指示信息用于触发分配第一承载的数据转发地址；该第一控制面节点接收该第一用户面节点发送的该数据转发地址；其中，该第一控制面节点的协议栈架构为无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
结合第三十三方面，在第三十三方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该第一控制面节点向第二用户面节点发送的该数据转发地址。
结合第三十三方面，在第三十三方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该第一控制面节点通过第二控制面节点，向第二用户面节点发送所述数据转发地址。
第三十四方面，提供了一种网络设备，用于执行第三十一方面或第三十一方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。具体地，该网络设备包括用于执行上述第三十一方面或第三十一方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法的模块。
第三十五方面，提供了一种网络设备，用于执行第三十二方面或第三十二方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。具体地，该网络设备包括用于执行上述第三十二方面或第三十二方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法的模块。
第三十六方面，提供了一种网络设备，用于执行第三十三方面或第三十三方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。具体地，该网络设备包括用于执行上述第三十三方面或第三十三方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法的模块。
第三十七方面，提供了一种网络设备，该网络设备包括存储器、收发器和至少一个处理器，所述存储器、所述收发器和所述至少一个处理器通过线路互联，所述收发器用于执行第三十一方面及第三十一方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述控制面节点进行的消息收发的操作；所述至少一个处理器调用所述存储器中存储的所述指令，执行第三十一方面及第三十一方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述控制面节点进行的处理操作。
第三十八方面，提供了一种网络设备，该网络设备包括存储器、收发器和至少一个处理器，所述存储器、所述收发器和所述至少一个处理器通过线路互联，所述收发器用于执行第三十二方面及第三十二方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述用户面节点进行的消息收发的操作；所述至少一个处理器调用所述存储器中存储的所述指令，执行第三十二方面及第三十二方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述用户面节点进行的处理操作。
第三十九方面，提供了一种网络设备，该终端设备包括存储器、收发器和至少一个处理器，所述存储器、所述收发器和所述至少一个处理器通过线路互联，所述收发器用于执行第三十三方面及第三十三方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述第一控制面 节点进行的消息收发的操作；所述至少一个处理器调用所述存储器中存储的所述指令，执行第三十三方面及第三十三方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法中，在所述第一控制面节点进行的处理操作。
第四十方面，提供了一种芯片系统，应用于网络设备中，该芯片系统包括：至少一个处理器、至少一个存储器和接口电路，所述接口电路负责所述芯片系统与外界的信息交互，所述至少一个存储器、所述接口电路和所述至少一个处理器通过线路互联，所述至少一个存储器中存储有指令；所述指令被所述至少一个处理器执行，以进行上述各个方面的所述的方法中所述第一网络节点或者第二网络节点的操作。
第四十一方面，提供了一种通信系统，包括：网络设备，和/或，终端设备；其中，所述网络设备为上述各个方面所述的网络设备。
第四十二方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，应用于网络设备中，所述计算机程序产品包括一系列指令，当所述指令被运行时，以进行上述各个方面的所述的方法中所述第一网络节点、第二网络节点、控制面节点或者用户面节点的操作。
第四十三方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述各个方面的所述的方法。
附图说明
图1是本申请实施例的技术方案的一种应用场景的示意图。
图2是本申请实施例的技术方案的另一种应用场景的示意图。
图3是本申请实施例的技术方案的再一种应用场景的示意图。
图4是本申请实施例的技术方案的再一种应用场景的示意图。
图5是本申请实施例的技术方案的再一种应用场景的示意图。
图6是本申请实施例的传输方法的示意性流程图。
图7是本申请实施例的传输方法的另一示意性流程图。
图8是一种SI和SIB的映射关系图。
图9是本申请实施例的传输方法的再一示意性流程图。
图10是本申请实施例的传输方法的再一示意性流程图。
图11是本申请实施例的传输方法的再一示意性流程图。
图12是本申请实施例的传输方法的再一示意性流程图。
图13是本申请实施例的传输方法的再一示意性流程图。
图14是一种RRC消息的MAC协议层示意图。
图15是本申请实施例的传输方法的再一示意性流程图。
图16是本申请实施例的传输方法的再一示意性流程图。
图17是本申请实施例的传输方法的再一示意性流程图。
图18是本申请实施例的网络设备的示意性框图。
图19是本申请实施例的网络设备的另一示意性框图。
图20是本申请实施例的终端设备的示意性框图。
图21是本申请实施例的网络设备的再一示意性框图。
图22是本申请实施例的网络设备的再一示意性框图。
图23是本申请实施例的网络设备的再一示意性框图。
图24是本申请实施例的网络设备的再一示意性框图。
图25是本申请实施例的终端设备的另一示意性框图。
图26是本申请实施例的网络设备的再一示意性框图。
图27是本申请实施例的网络设备的再一示意性框图。
图28是本申请实施例的网络设备的再一示意性框图。
图29是本申请实施例的通信设备的示意性框图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图，对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。
本申请实施例适用于各种形式的包含网络设备中部分功能分离的系统，图1示出了本申请实施例的技术方案的一种应用场景的示意图，如图1所示，该网络设备中部分功能分离为第一网络节点和第二网络节点。
具体地，图2示出了本申请实施例的技术方案的另一种应用场景的示意图，如图2所示，在CRAN架构中，引入了CU-DU的切分，DU可以对应于图1中的第一网络节点，CU对应于图1中的第二网络节点。
应理解，第一网络节点和第二网络节点可以是一个整体网络架构中的两个物理或者逻辑分离模块，也可以是完全独立的两个逻辑网元。
还应理解，该第二网络节点可以进行控制面和用户面分离，形成第二网络节点的用户面和第二网络节点的控制面。
CU具有无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control，RRC)或者部分RRC控制功能，包含现有基站的所有的协议层功能或者部分协议层功能；比如只包含RRC功能或者部分RRC功能，或者包含RRC功能或者业务数据适配协议(Service Data Adaptation Protocol,SDAP)层功能，或者包含RRC/分组数据汇聚协议(Packet Data Convergence Protocol，PDCP)层功能，或者包含RRC/PDCP以及部分无线链路层控制协议(Radio Link Control，RLC)层功能；或者包含RRC/PDCP/媒体接入控制(Media Access Control，MAC)层，甚至部分或者全部物理层PHY功能，也不排除其它任何可能性。
DU具有现有基站的全部或者部分协议层功能，即RRC/SDAP/PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY的部分协议层功能单元，比如包含部分RRC功能和PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY等协议层功能，或者包含PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY等协议层功能，或者包含RLC/MAC/PHY等协议层功能或者包含部分RLC/MAC/PHY功能，或者只包含全部或者部分PHY功能；需要注意的是这里提及的各个协议层的功能可能发生变化，均在本申请保护的范围内。
应理解，在本申请实施例中，可以将不同的协议层分别部署在第一网络节点和第二网络节点中，一种可能的实现方式是，在第二网络节点中至少部署第一协议层和第二协议层，在第一网络节点中至少部署第三协议层和第四协议层，
例如，第一协议层可以为RRC层，第二协议层可以为PDCP层，第三协议层可以为MAC层，第四协议层可以为PHY层。
应理解，上述对第一协议层、第二协议层、第三协议层和第四协议层的列举仅为示例性说明，不应对本申请构成任何限定。该第一协议层和第二协议层也可以为现有协议(例 如，LTE协议)或者未来协议中定义的其他协议层，本申请对此并未特别限定。
又例如，在5G网络中，新型的中继节点也有新的技术进展，例如，中继节点仅部署有层2(例如，包括无线链路控制(resource link control，RLC)层、MAC层等)和层1(例如，包括PHY层)的协议栈架构，而未部署层2以上的全部协议栈功能，例如全部RRC层功能。因此，宿主基站产生的数据或信令，需要由中继节点转发给终端设备。
应理解，本申请实施例中的第一网络节点可以对应于CU-DU架构中的DU，也可以对应于上述中继节点，第二网络节点可以对应于CU-DU架构中的CU，也可以对应于上述宿主基站，或者CU和DU对应于上述宿主基站，DU和UE之间通过一个中继节点或者多个中继节点进行传输，UE的上一跳中继节点即对应第一网络节点。
图3示出了根据本申请实施例的技术方案的再一种应用场景的示意图，如图3所示，本申请实施例的技术方案适用于NR CU-DU架构系统，对于NR CU-DU系统架构下，CU和DU之间的接口为F1接口，基站1(gNB1)和基站2(gNB2)之间的接口为Xn接口，基站与核心网(5GC)之间的接口为NG接口。
图4和图5示出了根据本申请实施例的技术方案的再一种应用场景的示意图，如图4所示，本申请实施例的技术方案适用于LTE CU-DU架构系统，区别在于CU和DU之间是V1接口，该V1接口与F1接口类似，基站(eNB)之间的接口为X2接口，CU可以与核心网EPC有连接，也可以与NR核心网5GC有连接。
应理解，当前第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd Generation Partnership Project，3GPP)将CU-DU之间的接口命名为F1，F1接口上包含控制面(Control Plane，CP)和用户面(User Plane，UP)，控制面的传输层协议为流控制传输协议(Stream Control Transmission Protocol，SCTP)，传输的应用层消息为F1AP(Application Protocol)消息。用户面的传输层协议为用户层面的GPRS隧道协议(GPRS Tunnelling Protocol-User plane，GTP-U)。
应理解，本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：全球移动通讯(Global System of Mobile Communication，GSM)系统、码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access，CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access，WCDMA)系统、长期演进(Long Term Evolution，LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(Frequency Division Duplex，FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(Time Division Duplex，TDD)、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System，UMTS)、未来的第五代(5th-Generation，5G)通信系统以及CRAN等通信系统。
还应理解，本申请实施例的网络设备可以是用于与终端设备进行通信的设备，例如，可以是GSM系统或CDMA中的基站(Base Transceiver Station，BTS)与基站控制器(Base Station Controller，BSC)的结合，也可以是WCDMA系统中的基站(NodeB，NB)与无线网控制器(Radio Network Controller，RNC)，还可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(Evolutional Node B，eNB或eNodeB)，或者该网络设备可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来5G网络中的接入网设备，比如下一代基站，或未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(Public Land Mobile Network，PLMN)网络中的接入网设备等。
具体地，第三代移动通信技术(3rd-Generation，3G)中的UMTS系统，存在无线网络控制节点和基站分离的场景；在LTE系统中，存在有基带模块和射频模块分离的情景，即射频拉远的场景；数据中心(Data Center，DC)场景，需要两个不同的网络之间互联； 大小站场景，大小站相互连接存在接口；LTE与Wifi聚合(LTE-Wifi aggregation，LWA)场景；在5G系统中存在各种无小区(non-cell)场景(终端可以在各个小区之间自由随意切换，各个小区之间没有明确的界线)，存在一个控制节点和所有小区连接，或者在小区下面连接各个传输节点；CRAN场景，存在BBU切分的场景；CRAN虚拟化场景，BBU的某一部分功能集中部署，虚拟化，另外一部分功能分开部署，两个部分之间存在物理分开部署可能性；应理解，不同系统/制式共存场景都在本申请适用的范围内。
本申请结合终端设备描述了各个实施例。终端设备也可以指用户设备(User Equipment，UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。接入终端可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol，SIP)电话、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop，WLL)站、个人数字处理(Personal Digital Assistant，PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备，未来5G网络中的终端设备或者PLMN中的终端设备等。
图6是根据本申请实施例的传输方法100的示意性流程图，如图6所示，该传输方法100中的第一网络节点可以为图1中的第一网络节点，还可以为图2中的DU，该传输方法100中的第二网络节点可以为图1中的第二网络节点，还可以为图2中的CU，该方法100包括：
S110，第二网络节点确定至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域；
S120，该第二网络节点向第一网络节点发送第一指示信息，该第一网络节点接收来自于该第二网络节点的该第一指示信息，该第一指示信息可以用于指示该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域；
S130，该第一网络节点向终端设备发送该至少一个系统信息和该第一指示信息，该终端设备接收来自于该第一网络节点的该至少一个系统信息和该第一指示信息，以便于该终端设备获知该至少一个系统信息所应用的有效区域。
应理解，该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域可以互不相同，也可以部分相同，或者，每个系统信息的有效区域都相同。
可选地，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或
该第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
系统信息(System Information,SI)的种类可以包括主信息块(Master Information Block，MIB)，系统信息块1(System Information Block1，SIB1)，以及其他系统消息other SIs(比如：编号为2～22的SIB2-SIB22)。SI还可以根据发送的方式分为最小系统消息MSI和other SIs，其中MSI主要包含MIB和SIB1。特别地，终端设备可以请求other SIs，网络设备可以通过广播或者专有RRC信令的方式发送请求的other SI。系统消息可以分为多个系统消息块，每个SI block包含哪些SIB，可以是协议规定，也可以由网络设备来具体决定。如果SI block包含哪些SIB由网络设备决定，则网络设备需要在MSI中进行广播告知终端设备。
具体而言，该第二网络节点首先确定有效区域(area ID)，该有效区域是系统信息 SI对应的有效区域，该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域，该第一网络节点接收来自于该第二网络节点的该第一指示信息后，将该至少一个系统信息和该第一指示信息广播给终端设备，终端设备接收该至少一个系统信息和该第一指示信息，该终端设备可以获知该至少一个系统信息所应用的有效区域，当该终端设备移动时，该终端设备会获取新的系统信息的有效区域，如果有效区域没有变化，则该终端设备就不用重新读取系统信息了。
可以理解，第一指示信息可以包括该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域，或者，第一指示信息包括系统信息的有效区域，或者，第一指示信息包括系统信息的有效区域以及位图信息，其中所述位图信息可以使用一个指示列表来替代(本申请中所描述的位图信息均可以使用指示列表来替代，下文不再赘述)。所述位图信息是一个0/1的bitmap指示(如，00001101等，其中0表示系统信息在本小区有效，1表示系统信息在area ID相同的小区内有效)，所述指示列表是一个单独的指示，如SIB2:0，SIB3:1等等，其中0表示系统信息在本小区有效，1表示系统信息在area ID相同的小区内有效。
可以理解，如果有效区域是既可以指示小区级别也可以指示区域级别的，例如系统信息可以只在当前小区内有效，也可以在区域标识相同的小区内有效，那么第一指示信息包括系统信息的有效区域和位图信息；如果有效区域只是指示区域级别的，例如系统信息只在区域标识相同的小区内有效，那么第一指示信息包括系统信息的有效区域。
可选的，所述有效区域可以只包括区域标识area ID，或者，所述有效区域也可以包括area ID和位图信息，或者，所述有效区域也可以包括area ID和指示信息，其中所述area ID是区域标识，用于识别系统信息可以应用的区域标识，即每个小区有一个area ID或者每个小区有一个area ID list，所述位图信息是一个0/1的bitmap指示(如，00001101等，其中0表示系统信息在本小区有效，1表示系统信息在area ID相同的小区内有效)，所述指示信息是一个单独的指示，如SIB2:0，SIB3:1等等，其中0表示系统信息在本小区有效，1表示系统信息在area ID相同的小区内有效。
可选的，所述第一指示信息可以是由网络操作和维护(Operation Administration and Maintenance，OAM)配置给第二网络节点或者第一网络节点：
如果OAM配置所述第一指示信息给第二网络节点，则第二网络节点需要把所述第一指示信息发送给第一网络节点；或者
如果OAM配置所述第一指示信息给第一网络节点，则第一网络节点可以直接发送给终端设备。可选的，所述第一指示信息中的有效区域的area ID是可以通过OAM直接配置，即OAM直接配置给第一网络节点，而第一指示信息中的有效区域的位图信息是第二网络节点确定的。
可选的，所述第一指示信息中的有效区域的位图信息是可以通过OAM直接配置，即OAM直接配置给第一网络节点，而第一指示信息中的有效区域的area ID是第二网络节点确定的。
具体的，所述第一指示信息用于指示至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域，也即第二网络节点向第一网络节点发送的第一指示信息为至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息对应的有效区域，所述第一指示信息只包括area ID，如信元格式如下：
IE/Group Name
SI list
>SI
>area ID
或者：
IE/Group Name
SIB list
>SIB
>area ID
信元格式不限于上述表格。
需要说明的是，对于所述可选项，area ID可以是一个值(如area ID为5)，也可以是一个ID列表，如(areaID list，5、6、7)。
还需要说明的是，对于所述可选项，当第一网络节点接收到第二网络节点发送的系统信息的有效区域后，第一网络节点可以生成一个位图信息。
可选的，所述第一指示信息用于指示至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域，也即第二网络节点向第一网络节点发送的第一指示信息为至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息对应的有效区域，所述第一指示信息包括area ID和位图信息，如信元格式如下：
IE/Group Name
SI list
>SI
>area ID
Bitmap
或者：
IE/Group Name
SIB list
>SIB
>area ID
Bitmap
信元格式不限于上述表格。
需要说明的是，对于所述可选项，area ID可以是一个值(如area ID为5)，也可以是一个ID列表，如(areaID list，5、6、7)。
还需要说明的是，对于所述可选项，当第一网络节点接收到第二网络节点发送的系统信息的有效区域以及位图信息后，第一网络节点也可以修改所述位图信息。
可选的，所述第一指示信息用于指示系统信息的有效区域，也即第二网络节点向第一网络节点发送的第一指示信息为系统信息的有效区域，所述第一指示信息只包括area ID，所有系统信息或者所有系统信息块对应的area ID都相同，表1和表2示出了两种第一指示信息的信元列表，如表1和表2所示。
表1第一指示信息的信元列表
IE/Group Name
SI list
>SI
area ID
或者：
表2第一指示信息的另一信元列表
IE/Group Name
SIB list
>SIB
area ID
信元格式不限于上述表格。
需要说明的是，对于所述可选项，area ID可以是一个值(如area ID为5)，也可以是一个ID列表，如(areaID list，5、6、7)。
还需要说明的是，对于所述可选项，当第一网络节点接收到第二网络节点发送的系统信息的有效区域后，第一网络节点可以生成一个位图信息。
可选的，所述第一指示信息中还指示一个系统信息的有效区域，也即第二网络节点向第一网络节点发送的第一指示信息为系统信息的有效区域，所有系统信息或者所有系统信息块对应的area ID都相同，表3和表4示出了两种第一指示信息的信元列表，如表3和表4所示。
表3第一指示信息的再一信元列表
IE/Group Name
SI list
area ID
Bitmap
或者：
表4第一指示信息的再一信元列表
IE/Group Name
SIB list
area ID
Bitmap
信元格式不限于上述表格。
需要说明的是，对于所述可选项，area ID可以是一个值(如area ID为5)，也可以是一个ID列表，如(areaID list，5、6、7)。
还需要说明的是，对于所述可选项，当第一网络节点接收到第二网络节点发送的系统信息的有效区域以及位图信息后，第一网络节点也可以修改所述位图信息。
具体的，所述bitmap信息用于指示系统信息适用的区域，即某些系统信息适用于本小区，某些系统信息不仅仅适用于本小区，还适用于其它小区。(例如，other SIs中有4个SI，SIB有22个，如果bitmap指示的是SI粒度的，则bitmap位数为4位的0/1指示，如指示可以是0110，0代表系统信息在本小区有效，1代表系统信息在area ID相同的小区 内有效，所述0110的位置与SI的编号一一对应，也可以是协议定义，本发明不限定；如果bitmap指示的是SIB粒度的，则bitmap指示可以是一串22位的0/1指示，如指示可以是0011…..1001，0代表系统信息在本小区有效，1代表系统信息在area ID相同的小区内有效，所述22位的位置与SIB的编号一一对应，也可以是协议定义，本申请对此并不作任何限定)。
第一网络节点收到第二网络节点发送系统信息以及第一指示信息后，将所述系统信息以及第一指示信息发送给终端设备，具体的，第一网络节点将系统信息，area ID以及位图信息的至少一种发送给终端设备。当第一指示信息为所述bitmap和area ID时，终端设备收到bitmap和area ID后，如果需要读取的系统信息对应的bitmap值是0，则认为读取到的系统信息在本小区有效，当移动到其他小区后需要重新读取系统信息；如果需要读取的系统信息对应的bitmap值是1，则认为读取到的系统信息在area ID的小区内有效，如在area ID为6的小区内有效，当终端设备移动到另一个小区内，则该终端设备会获取新的系统信息的area ID，如果area ID为6，则该终端设备就不用重新读取系统信息了。
具体的，所述area ID和bitmap信息可以在CU发送给DU的F1 AP消息中携带，例如可以在F1 setup response消息中携带，或者，可以在CU发送给DU的gNB-CU configuration update消息中携带，或者，可以在gNB-DU的gNB-DU configuration update acknowledge消息中携带，或者也可以在F1 AP的其他现有消息中携带，或者也可以在新的F1 AP消息中携带，本申请对此并不作任何限定。
需要说明的是，所述有效区域(area ID)可以是cell ID(PCI)/cell ID list(PCI list)，也可以是1/2/3等整型的数字。
需要说明的是，本申请中涉及到的area ID，即每个小区均有一个area ID，area ID可以是一个整型的数字。
应理解，该第一网络节点的协议栈架构可以为无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种，该第二网络节点的协议栈架构可以为无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
还应理解，该area ID可以是和小区一一对应的，即该area ID可以为cell ID，还可以为cell list，还可以为1/2/3等整型的数字。
还应理解，该area ID也可以是和基站一一对应的，即该area ID可以为gNB ID，还可以为gNB list，还可以为1/2/3等整型的数字。
表5示出了该第一指示信息的一种信元列表，如表5所示。
表5第一指示信息的信元列表
IE/Group Name
＞cell list
＞＞cell ID
＞＞＞area ID
应理解，表5中的IE标识信息元素，Group Name表示组名。
还应理解，该第一网络节点可以为图3中的gNB-DU，或者，该第一网络节点可以为图4或图5中的eNB-DU，该第二网络节点可以为图3中的gNB-CU，或者，该第一网络节点可以为图4或图5中的eNB-CU。
例如，该第一网络节点可以为图3中的gNB-DU，该第二网络节点为图3中的gNB-CU，gNB-CU可以通过F1接口消息携带该第一指示信息，gNB-DU启动F1接口建立向gNB-CU发送F1接口建立请求(F1 setup request)消息，gNB-CU向gNB-DU回复的F1接口建立请求响应(F1 setup response)消息中携带该第一指示信息。
又例如，该第一网络节点可以为图3中的gNB-DU，该第二网络节点为图3中的gNB-CU，gNB-CU可以通过对gNB-DU的配置更新消息的响应中携带该第一指示信息，gNB-DU启动gNB-DU更新流程，向gNB-CU发送gNB-DU配置更新(configuration update)消息，gNB-CU响应该配置更新消息，向gNB-DU发送gNB-DU配置更新确认(configuration update acknowledge)消息中携带该第一指示信息。
再例如，该第一网络节点可以为图3中的gNB-DU，该第二网络节点为图3中的gNB-CU，gNB-CU可以通过gNB-CU的配置更新消息中携带该第一指示信息，gNB-CU向gNB-DU发送配置更新消息，该配置更新消息中包括该第一指示信息。
应理解，gNB-DU收到该第一指示信息后，可以将该第一指示信息放在SIB1中广播给终端设备。
需要说明的是，本申请中的area ID可以是和小区一一对应的，即该area ID可以为cell ID，还可以为cell list，还可以为1/2/3等整型的数字，也可以是其他定义的能够识别区域的标识，本申请在此不限定。
本申请实施例的传输方法，通过第二网络节点确定至少一个系统信息的有效区域，并通过第一网络节点发送给终端设备，有助于解决将系统信息的有效区域指示给终端设备的问题。
可选地，该传输方法100还包括：
该第二网络节点配置封闭用户群CSG指示信息和CSG标识信息，该CSG指示信息用于指示第一网络节点的小区是CSG小区，或者，该CSG指示信息用于指示第一网络节点的小区不是CSG小区。
该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点发送该CSG指示信息和CSG标识信息，该第一网络节点接收来自于该第二网络节点的CSG指示信息和CSG标识信息。
具体而言，该CSG指示信息和CSG标识信息可以由该第二网络节点配置，那么该第二网络节点可以在该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点发送的消息中携带该CSG指示信息和CSG标识信息给该第一网络节点，该第一网络节点可以在最终的系统信息中增加该CSG指示信息和CSG标识信息并广播给终端设备。
例如，如果CSG小区是gNB-CU配置的，那么gNB-CU可以在F1接口消息中携带所述CSG指示信息和CSG标识信息给gNB-DU，gNB-DU可以在SIB1中增加该CSG指示信息和CSG标识信息并广播给终端设备。
应理解，该CSG小区可以是gNB-DU配置的，那么gNB-DU在触发建立与gNB-CU的F1接口的时候，可以在F1接口建立请求消息中携带CSG标识信息，用于gNB-CU获取CSG成员状态。具体的，所述CSG标识信息可以是显示指示在F1接口消息中，也可以携带在SIB1中指示给gNB-CU。
可选的，对于上述CSG小区的配置下，gNB-CU或者gNB-DU还可能对小区的接入模式进行配置，如果小区接入模式(cell access mode，有三种接入模式closed，open，hybrid。 作用是对UE接入控制)如果是gNB-DU确定的，那么DU需要把所述小区接入模式告知CU，用于CU与核心网交互的时候告知核心网，由核心网进行接入控制。此方案同样适用于LTE CU-DU的系统。或者，如果小区接入模式(cell access mode，有三种接入模式closed，open，hybrid。作用是对UE接入控制)如果是gNB-CU确定的，那么CU需要把所述小区接入模式告知DU。
可选的，gNB-DU还有一些参数需要发送给gNB-CU(即所述参数是gNB-DU才可以获取的参数)，用于gNB-CU编译other SIs中的SIB，具体的参数包括：
-SIB2中的部分参数：ac-barring(Access Class Barring)、UE timers and constants、frequency信息、multiband信息、MBSFN子帧配置等的至少一种
-SIB13中的部分参数：MCCH配置，对于所述配置，gNB-CU/OAM需要向gNB-DU提供MBSFN区域。
-SIB14中的部分参数：EAB(Extended Access Barring)参数。
-SIB16中的部分参数：GPS time，国际协调时间(Coordinated Universal Time，UTC)等的至少一种。
-SIB18/19中的部分参数：sidelink通信相关资源配置，对于所述配置，gNB-CU/OAM(Operation，Administration and Maintenance，操作运维管理系统)需要向gNB-DU提供支持sidelink通信的相关区域。
-SIB20中的部分参数：多媒体广播和组播服务(Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service，MBMS)使用单小区点对多点技术(SC-PTM)的的传输控制信息
-SIB21中的部分参数：V2X(Vehicle-to-Everything，车辆物联)sidelink通信配置，，对于所述配置，gNB-CU/OAM需要向gNB-DU提供支持sidelink通信的相关区域。
或者，可选的，gNB-DU也可以具有上述几种SIB的编译功能，即gNB-CU编译后的SIB发送给gNB-DU后，gNB-DU可以修改里面的部分参数，即重新编译等。
可选地，该至少一个系统信息中的至少部分系统信息有更新时，该传输方法100还包括：
该第二网络节点确定第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述至少部分系统信息、所述至少部分系统信息中的系统信息块、所述至少部分系统信息的有效区域中的至少一种；
该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点发送该第二指示信息，该第一网络节点接收来自于该第二网络节点的该第二指示信息。
具体而言，当至少一个系统信息中的至少部分系统信息有更新时，该第二网络节点可以向该第一网络节点发送该第二指示信息，该第一网络节点收到该第二指示信息后，将该第二指示信息广播给终端设备。
例如，gNB-CU和gNB-DU可以通过F1接口消息交互各自更新的系统信息，具体地：
若通过gNB-DU的配置更新流程进行系统消息更新：gNB-DU启动gNB-DU更新流程，gNB-DU向gNB-CU发送gNB-DU configuration update消息，消息中包括gNB-DU的系统信息(MIB和/或SIB1)；gNB-CU响应gNB-DU的更新并发送gNB-DU configuration update acknowledge消息到gNB-DU，该消息中携带更新的gNB-CU的系统信息，该更新的系统信息可以是和SIB一一对应的，也可以是和SI一一对应的，即所更新的系统信息 可以是SIB粒度的，也可以是SI粒度。
可选地，configuration update acknowledge消息中还包括系统信息更新指示，所述更新指示可以是只指示系统信息有更新，即是一个value tag，如果系统信息更新了value tag值加1，从而接收端收到后可以识别出系统信息是否更新，或者，所述更新指示也可以具体指示哪一个SIB/SI更新了，即SIB粒度的或SI粒度的，从而接收端收到后可以直接识别出哪一个SIB/SI更新了。需要说明的是，value tag可以是SIB粒度的或者SI粒度的，即value tag和SIB或者SI一一对应。
可选地，消息中还包括area ID，该area ID用于指示所更新的系统信息有效的区域。
应理解，所述area ID与value tag结合可以指示更大范围的多个小区的系统信息是否有效。
若通过gNB-CU的配置更新流程进行系统消息更新：gNB-CU启动gNB-CU更新流程，向gNB-DU发送gNB-CU configuration update消息，消息中包括gNB-CU更新的系统信息，所述gNB-CU更新的系统信息同前面所描述的类似，即可以包括更新的系统信息SIB/SI，更新指示/value tag，area ID中的一种或多种，此处不再赘述；gNB-DU响应gNB-CU的更新并发送gNB-CU configuration update acknowledge消息到gNB-CU。
上面结合图6，详细得描述了根据本申请实施例的传输方法100，方法100中介绍了如何将将系统信息的有效区域指示给终端设备，下面结合图7，详细描述根据本申请实施例的传输方法200，方法200中介绍了系统信息的配置信息的确定过程。
图7示出了根据本申请实施例的传输方法200的示意性流程图，如图7所示，该传输方法200中的第一网络节点可以为图1中的第一网络节点，还可以为图2中的DU，该传输方法200中的第二网络节点可以为图1中的第二网络节点，还可以为图2中的CU，该方法200包括：
S210，第一网络节点向第二网络节点发送第一网络节点的系统信息，该第二网络节点接收该第一网络节点发送的该第一网络节点的系统信息。
例如，该第一网络节点可以为图3中的gNB-DU，该第二网络节点为图3中的gNB-CU，gNB-DU可以通过F1接口建立请求消息中携带该gNB-DU的系统信息(所述系统信息是以RRC container的形式出现)，gNB-DU的系统信息可以为MIB、SIB1，MIB和SIB1的内容可以类似于现有LTE/NR定义的MIB和SIB1，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
应理解，gNB-DU还可以通过gNB-DU的配置更新消息携带gNB-DU的系统信息，还可以通过gNB-DU对gNB-CU的配置更新确认消息中携带gNB-DU的系统信息。
应理解，F1接口建立消息、gNB-DU的配置更新消息和gNB-CU的配置更新消息都可以用来交互系统信息，交互的系统信息可以相同，也可以不同。
S220，该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点发送第一配置信息，该第一网络节点接收来自于该第二网络节点的该第一配置信息，该第一配置信息包括至少一个系统信息块、该至少一个系统信息块的调度信息、该至少一个系统信息和该至少一个系统信息块的映射关系、该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的调度周期中的至少一种。
可选地，该至少一个系统信息块的调度信息包括至少一个系统信息块中每个系统信息块的调度周期，该至少一个系统信息块中每个系统信息块的警示区域列表和该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息块的广播次数中的至少一种。
需要说明的是，上述S210和S220步骤没有先后顺序。
S230，该第一网络节点确定第二配置信息，该第二配置信息用于该第一网络节点发送该至少一个系统信息所使用，该第二配置信息包括至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的窗口长度、该至少一个系统信息块的调度信息、该至少一个系统信息和至少一个系统信息块的映射关系、该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的调度周期中的至少一种。
具体而言，该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点发送该第一配置信息，该第一配置信息包括至少一个系统信息块、该至少一个系统信息块的调度信息、该至少一个系统信息和该至少一个系统信息块的映射关系、该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的调度周期中的至少一种，该第一网络节点接收来自于该第二网络节点的该第一配置信息后，该第一网络节点确定该第二配置信息，该第二配置信息用于该第一网络节点发送该至少一个系统信息所使用，该第二配置信息包括至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的窗口长度、该至少一个系统信息块的调度信息、该至少一个系统信息和至少一个系统信息块的映射关系、该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的调度周期中的至少一种。
下面以该第一网络节点为图3中的gNB-DU，该第二网络节点为图3中的gNB-CU为例进行说明，gNB-DU和gNB-CU通过F1接口建立消息进行系统信息的交互。
例如，gNB-CU向gNB-DU发送该第一配置信息，gNB-DU接收该gNB-CU发送的该第一配置信息，该第一配置信息为所有的Other SIs里的SIB(除MIB和SIB1之外的其他SIB，如SIB2、SIB3、SIB4…)和所有的Other SIs里的SIB的调度信息，其中所述other SIs里的SIB的调度信息为可选项。
表6示出了一种该第一配置信息的信元信息，表6所示。
表6第一配置信息的信元信息
IE/Group Name
SIB list
＞SIB type
＞＞SIB message(SIB container)
＞＞SIB schdule infomation
应理解，表6中的SIB type可以是SIB2、SIB3等，SIB message也可以称之为SIB container，具体内容类似LTE/NR中的定义，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
还应理解，gNB-CU向gNB-DU发送Other SIs(除MIB和SIB1之外的其他SIB，如SIB2、SIB3、SIB4…)时，需要把Other SIs里的具体SIB的调度信息发送给gNB-DU，该Other SIs里的具体SIB的调度信息可以为Other SIs里的具体SIB的调度周期/传输周期、Other SIs里的具体SIB的预警区域列表和Other SIs里的具体SIB的广播次数中的至少部分。
还应理解，该SIB的预警区域列表可以为小区列表、跟踪区列表以及紧急区域列表，具体的，小区标识可以是全球小区识别码(Cell Global Identifier，CGI)、跟踪区列表内为跟踪区域标识(Tracking Area identity，TAI)等标识信息。
还应理解，Other SIs里的具体SIB的调度周期/传输周期、Other SIs里的具体SIB的预警区域列表和Other SIs里的具体SIB的广播次数主要适用于SIB10、SIB11和SIB12，用于地震预警等场景，gNB-DU收到该配置信息时，可以直接使用，也可以作为参考使用， 本申请并不限于此。
gNB-DU收到该第一配置信息后，可以确定该第二配置信息，该第二配置信息为other SIs里的SI窗口长度(SI-windowlength)、SI与SIB的映射关系以及SI的调度周期(SI-periodicity)。
应理解，SI与SIB的映射关系为对应的SI中所包括的具体SIB type(SIB-mappinginfo)。
还应理解，gNB-DU可以参考gNB-CU发送的Other SIs里的SI的调度信息，也可以将其作为参考，自己重新确定Other SIs里的SI的调度信息。
图8示出了一种SI和SIB的映射关系图，如图8所示，gNB-DU收到gNB-CU发送的SIB的调度信息后，根据SI的传输周期和SIB的调度信息，确定SI和SIB的映射关系，例如，gNB-DU确定SI1的传输周期为160ms，SIB2和SIB3的传输周期也为160ms，则gNB-DU将SIB2和SIB3放在SI1中广播给终端设备；gNB-DU确定SI2的传输周期为320ms，SIB4和SIB5的传输周期也为320ms，则gNB-DU将SIB4和SIB5放在SI2中广播给终端设备；gNB-DU确定SI3的传输周期为320ms，SIB6的传输周期也为320ms，则gNB-DU将SIB6放在SI3中广播给终端设备；gNB-DU确定SI4的传输周期为640ms，SIB6的传输周期也为640ms，则gNB-DU将SIB7放在SI4中广播给终端设备，同时，所述确定SI和SIB的映射关系要放在SIB1中广播给终端设备。
应理解，每个SI只在一个SI窗口中传输：(1)一个SI跟一个SI窗口相关联，该SI窗口内只能发这个SI且可以重复发送多次(发多少次，在哪些子帧上发送等，取决于网络设备的实现)，但不能发送其它SI消息；(2)SI窗口之间是紧挨着的(如果相邻的话)，既不重叠，也不会有空隙；(3)所有SI的SI窗口长度都相同；(4)不同SI的周期是相互独立的。
还应理解，如果other SIs是可以由gNB-DU编码的，那么gNB-DU决定SI配置后直接编码并广播，否则，如果other SIs由gNB-CU编码的，那么gNB-DU还需要把所决定的SI和SIB的映射关系告知gNB-CU，由gNB-CU编码后再发送给gNB-DU，由DU广播(应理解，所述编码的含义即可以理解为other SIs的各个SI是谁生成的。)
又例如，gNB-CU向gNB-DU发送该第一配置信息，gNB-DU接收该gNB-CU发送的该第一配置信息，该第一配置信息为所有的Other SIs和所有的Other SIs的调度信息、SI和SIB的映射关系。
表7示出了一种该第一配置信息的信元信息，表7所示。
表7第一配置信息的信元信息
IE/Group Name
SI list
＞SI ID
＞SI message
＞＞SIB-mappinginfo
＞＞＞SIB type
应理解，表7中的SI ID可以为SI1、SI2等，具体SI中包括哪些SIB由gNB-CU确定，SIB的具体内容类似LTE/NR中的定义，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
gNB-DU收到该第一配置信息后，可以确定该第二配置信息，该第二配置信息SI窗 口长度(SI-windowlength)以及SI的调度周期。
再例如，NB-CU向gNB-DU发送该第一配置信息，gNB-DU接收该gNB-CU发送的该第一配置信息，该第一配置信息为所有的Other SIs和所有的Other SIs的调度信息、SI和SIB的映射关系以及SI的调度周期。
表8示出了一种该第一配置信息的信元信息，表8所示。
表8第一配置信息的信元信息
IE/Group Name
SI list
＞SI ID
＞SI message
＞＞SI-periodicity
＞＞SIB-mappinginfo
＞＞＞SIB type
＞＞＞＞SIB message(SIB container)
gNB-DU收到该第一配置信息后，可以确定该第二配置信息，该第二配置信息SI窗口长度(SI-windowlength)。
应理解，上述系统信息的交互也可以通过gNB-DU配置更新消息来替换，即gNB-DU启动gNB-DU更新流程，向gNB-CU发送gNB-DU configuration update消息，消息中包括gNB-DU的系统信息(所述系统信息是以RRC container的形式出现)，gNB-CU响应gNB-DU的更新并发送gNB-DU configuration update acknowledge消息到gNB-DU，消息中包括该第一配置信息(所述系统信息是以RRC container的形式出现)，其中gNB-DU的系统信息和该第一配置信息同前文描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
还应理解，上述系统信息的交互也可以通过gNB-CU配置更新消息来替换，即gNB-CU启动gNB-CU更新流程，向gNB-DU发送gNB-CU configuration update消息，消息中包括该第一配置信息(所述第一配置信息是以RRC container的形式出现)，gNB-DU响应gNB-CU的更新并发送gNB-CU configuration update acknowledge消息到gNB-CU，消息中包括gNB-DU的系统信息(可选的，所述系统信息是以RRC container的形式出现)，其中gNB-DU的系统信息和该第一配置信息同前文描述，为了简洁，此处不再赘述。
S240，该第一网络节点向终端设备发送该至少一个系统信息，终端设备接收该第一网络节点发送的该至少一个系统信息。
本申请实施例的传输方法，通过第一网络节点接收第二网络节点系统信息的配置信息，有助于第一网络节点确定最终该至少一个系统信息的配置信息，从而将系统信息广播给终端设备。
应理解，方法100中的第一指示信息和方法200中的第一配置信息可以同时携带在gNB-CU向gNB-DU发送的消息(F1 setup update消息和configuration update消息)中，gNB-CU给gNB-DU发送的可能的信元列表如表9、表10和表11所示。
表9 gNB-CU给gNB-DU发送的可能的信元列表
IE/Group Name
cell list
＞cell ID
＞SIB list
＞＞SIB type
＞＞＞SIB message(SIB container)
＞＞＞SIB schdule infomation
＞＞area ID
表10 gNB-CU给gNB-DU发送的可能的信元列表
IE/Group Name
cell list
＞cell ID
＞SIlist
＞＞SI ID
＞＞SI message
＞＞＞SIB-periodicity
＞＞＞SIB-mappinginfo
＞＞＞＞SIB type
＞＞＞＞＞SIB message(SIB container)
＞＞area ID
表11 gNB-CU给gNB-DU发送的可能的信元列表
IE/Group Name
cell list
＞cell ID
＞SIlist
＞＞SI ID
＞＞SI message
＞＞＞SIB-mappinginfo
＞＞＞＞SIB type
＞＞＞＞＞SIB message(SIB container)
＞＞area ID
应理解，gNB-CU给gNB-DU发送的可能的信元列表还可以如表12、表13和表14所示。
表12 gNB-CU给gNB-DU发送的可能的信元列表
IE/Group Name
cell list
＞cell ID
＞SIB list
＞＞SIB type
＞＞＞SIB message(SIB container)
＞＞＞SIB schdule infomation
＞＞area ID
＞bitmap
表13 gNB-CU给gNB-DU发送的可能的信元列表
IE/Group Name
cell list
＞cell ID
＞SIlist
＞＞SI ID
＞＞SI message
＞＞＞SIB-periodicity
＞＞＞SIB-mappinginfo
＞＞＞＞SIB type
＞＞＞＞＞SIB message(SIB container)
＞＞area ID
＞bitmap
表14 gNB-CU给gNB-DU发送的可能的信元列表
IE/Group Name
cell list
＞cell ID
＞SIlist
＞＞SI ID
＞＞SI message
＞＞＞SIB-mappinginfo
＞＞＞＞SIB type
＞＞＞＞＞SIB message(SIB container)
＞＞area ID
＞bitmap
需要说明的是，所述表12、表13、表14中的bitmap为可选。
还应理解，gNB-CU给gNB-DU发送的可能的信元列表还可以如表15、表16和表17所示。
表15 gNB-CU给gNB-DU发送的可能的信元列表
IE/Group Name
cell list
＞cell ID
＞SIB list
＞＞SIB type
＞＞＞SIB message(SIB container)
＞＞＞SIB schdule infomation
＞area ID
＞bitmap
表16 gNB-CU给gNB-DU发送的可能的信元列表
IE/Group Name
cell list
＞cell ID
＞SIlist
＞＞SI ID
＞＞SI message
＞＞＞SIB-periodicity
＞＞＞SIB-mappinginfo
＞＞＞＞SIB type
＞＞＞＞＞SIB message(SIB container)
＞area ID
＞bitmap
表17 gNB-CU给gNB-DU发送的可能的信元列表
IE/Group Name
cell list
＞cell ID
＞SIlist
＞＞SI ID
＞＞SI message
＞＞＞SIB-mappinginfo
＞＞＞＞SIB type
＞＞＞＞＞SIB message(SIB container)
＞area ID
＞bitmap
需要说明的是，所述表15、表16、表17中的bitmap为可选。
还需要说明的是，如果上述表中的area ID可以是一个值，也可以是一个列表，如果area ID是一个值，则小区的area ID就是所述area ID；如果area ID是一个列表，则小区还需要配置一个area ID’，所述area ID’用于指示小区的area ID。以表18为例：
表18 gNB-CU给gNB-DU发送的可能的信元列表
IE/Group Name
cell list
＞cell ID
＞area’ID
＞SIlist
＞＞SI ID
＞＞SI message
＞＞＞SIB-periodicity
＞＞＞SIB-mappinginfo
＞＞＞＞SIB type
＞＞＞＞＞SIB message(SIB container)
＞＞area ID
＞bitmap
上文结合图7描述了根据本申请实施例的传输方法200，该方法200中的系统信息的配置由该第一网络节点确定，下面结合图9描述本申请实施例的传输方法300，方法300中该系统信息的配置由该第二网络节点确定。
图9示出了根据本申请实施例的传输方法300的示意性流程图，如图9所示，该传输方法300中的第一网络节点可以为图1中的第一网络节点，还可以为图2中的DU，该传输方法300中的第二网络节点可以为图1中的第二网络节点，还可以为图2中的CU，该方法300包括：
S310，第一网络节点向第二网络节点发送该第一网络节点的系统信息，该第二网络节点接收来自于该第一网络节点的系统信息；
S320，该第二网络节点确定第三配置信息，该第三配置信息包括至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的窗口长度、该至少一个系统信息块的调度信息、该至少一个系统信息和至少一个系统信息块的映射关系、该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的调度周期中的至少一种。
具体而言，该第一网络节点向该第二网络节点发送该第一网络节点的系统信息，该第二网络节点确定该第三配置信息，该第三配置信息包括至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的窗口长度、该至少一个系统信息块的调度信息、该至少一个系统信息和至少一个系统信息块的映射关系、该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的调度周期中的至少一种。
需要说明的是，上述S310和S320步骤没有先后顺序。
下面以该第一网络节点为图3中的gNB-DU，该第二网络节点为图3中的gNB-CU为例进行说明，gNB-DU和gNB-CU通过F1接口消息进行系统信息的交互。
例如，gNB-CU和gNB-DU之间通过F1接口建立消息或者gNB-CU/gNB-DU配置更新消息，具体地：
gNB-DU启动F1接口建立向gNB-CU发送F1 setup request消息，消息中包括gNB-DU的系统信息，gNB-DU的系统信息可以是MIB、SIB1，MIB和SIB1的具体内容可以类似现有LTE/NR定义的MIB和SIB1，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
gNB-CU响应gNB-DU的请求并发送F1 setup response消息到gNB-DU，消息中包括gNB-CU确定的SI配置信息，所述SI配置信息可以是在Step1.1之前配置好的，也可以在其之后配置好的，本申请并不限于此。
可选地，gNB-CU确定该第三配置信息，该第三配置信息为other SIs的SI窗口长度、other SIs中的SIB调度信息、SI和SIB的映射关系以及SI的调度周期中的至少一种。
可选地，上述步骤也可以通过gNB-CU/gNB-DU的配置更新消息来替换。
可选地，所述gNB-CU的给gNB-DU发送的消息中还可以携带有效区域(area ID)，所述有效区域的定义参见前面实施例，这里不再赘述。
上文结合图6至图9，详细的描述了有效区域和系统信息的配置信息的确定以及在网络节点之间的交互，下面结合图10和图11，详细描述终端设备在请求系统信息或系统信息块时的流程。
图10示出了根据本申请实施例的传输方法400的示意性流程图，如图10所示，该传输方法400中的第一网络节点可以为图1中的第一网络节点，还可以为图2中的DU，该传输方法400中的第二网络节点可以为图1中的第二网络节点，还可以为图2中的CU，该方法400包括：
S410，第一网络节点确定终端设备使用第一消息请求系统信息或系统信息块，该第一消息为随机接入第一消息或者随机接入第三消息，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；
S420，该第一网络节点向该终端设备发送第三指示信息，该终端设备接收来自于该第一网络节点的该第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示该终端设备使用该第一消息请求系统信息或系统信息块。
应理解，该终端设备可以根据该第三指示信息，向该第一网络节点请求系统信息或者系统信息块；或者，该终端设备根据该第三指示信息，向该第二网络节点请求系统信息或者系统信息块。
具体而言，该第一网络节点首先确定终端设备使用第一消息请求SI或者SIB，该第一消息为随机接入第一消息(MSG1)或者随机接入第三消息(MSG3)，该第一网络节点向该终端设备发送第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示该终端设备使用该第一消息请求系统信息或系统信息块，该终端设备根据该第三指示信息，向第一网络设备请求SI或SIB。
可选地，该第一网络节点确定该终端设备使用MSG1向该第一网络节点请求SI，该第三指示信息还用于指示至少一个系统信息或系统信息块和随机接入前导序列的映射关系。
例如，gNB-DU确定了终端设备所请求的系统信息与preamble码的映射关系，然后在系统信息(例如SIB1)中广播给终端设备该映射关系。该终端设备发送Preamble1表示申请SI1，preamble2表示申请SI2。后续当DU收到UE的preamble后，根据preamble和SI的对应关系，广播preamble对应的SI。
本申请实施例的传输方法，通过该第一网络节点确定终端设备使用MSG1或者MSG3请求系统信息或者系统信息块，有助于终端设备请求系统信息或者系统信息块时明确请求方式。
可选地，该第一网络节点确定该终端设备使用MSG1向该第一网络节点请求SI/SIB，该方法400还包括：
该第一网络节点向该终端设备发送系统信息请求响应信息，该终端设备接收该第一网络节点发送的系统信息请求响应信息。
可选地，该第一网络节点确定该终端设备使用MSG1向该第二网络节点请求SI/SIB，该方法400还包括：
该第一网络节点向该终端设备发送bitmap指示信息，该终端设备接收该第一网络节点发送的bitmap指示信息，该bitmap指示信息用于指示发给该终端设备的系统信息或者系统信息块。
应理解该终端设备基于MSG1请求系统信息或者系统信息块时，如果多个终端设备同时请求了不同的SI/SIB，那么该第一网络节点收到该请求后，发送系统信息请求响应，所述系统信息请求响应中包括响应信息(如ack)和bitmap指示的至少一种，所述bitmap指示用于指示哪些SI/SIB已经广播，具体的：
所述系统信息请求响应可以包含在媒体接入控制层MAC报头中，由第一网络节点通过媒体接入控制层控制元素MAC CE发送给该终端设备；
或者，所述系统信息请求响应可以包含在系统消息/系统信息中，由第一网络节点通过系统广播消息发送给该终端设备。
应理解，当有多个终端设备通过MSG3或者MSG1请求SI/SIB时，多个终端设备请求的SI或者SIB不同，那么该第一网络节点或者该第二网络节点可以使用bitmap指示哪些SI/SIB已经广播，从而终端设备可以根据需要来读取所需要的系统信息。
例如，UE1通过MSG1向DU请求SI2，UE2通过MSG1向DU请求SI3，DU可以在广播SI2和SI3的同时向UE1发送bitmap指示信息，该bitmap指示信息用于指示SI2和SI3已经广播，UE1可以使用SI2，当UE1需要使用SI3时，由于之前收到该bitmap指示信息，则UE1可以直接使用SI3。
可选地，该第一网络节点确定该终端设备使用MSG3向该第二网络节点请求SI/SIB，该方法400还包括：
该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点发送系统信息请求响应信息，该第一网络节点接收该第二网络节点发送的系统信息请求响应信息并发送给该终端设备；或者，该第二网络节点通过第一网络节点向终端设备转发系统信息请求响应信息，该终端设备接收该第一网络节点发送的系统信息请求响应信息。可选地，该第一网络节点确定该终端设备使用MSG3向该第二网络节点请求SI/SIB，该方法400还包括：
该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点发送bitmap指示信息，该第一网络节点接收该第二网络节点发送的bitmap指示信息并发送给该终端设备；或者，该第二网络节点通过第一网络节点向该终端设备转发bitmap指示信息，该终端设备接收该第一网络节点发送的bitmap指示信息，该bitmap指示信息用于指示发给该终端设备的系统信息或系统信息块。
应理解，该终端设备基于MSG3请求系统信息或者系统信息块时，如果多个终端设备同时请求了不同的SI/SIB，那么该第二网络节点收到该请求后，发送系统信息请求响应，并在系统信息请求响应中包括系统信息请求响应信息(如ack)，所述响应信息用于指示该终端设备所请求的系统信息已经响应并即将广播，可选的，所述系统信息请求响应中还可以包括一个bitmap指示信息，所述bitmap指示信息用于指示哪些SI/SIB已经广播，可选的，所述系统信息请求响应还可以包括一个冲突解决标识信息(CRID)。
例如，CU收到请求消息，识别出是系统信息请求，那么CU就回复系统信息请求响应信息，也要给DU发系统信息传输命令信息(如，系统信息传输命令信息通过system information command消息从CU发送给DU)，CU还可以发一个bitmap指示信息，该系统信息请求响应信息是用于指示该终端设备系统信息即将广播，系统信息传输命令消息是 发送给DU，用于命令DU去广播所请求的系统信息，bitmap指示信息是用于指示UE哪些系统信息或系统信息块已经广播。
应理解，该系统信息请求响应信息可以通过RRC消息发送：由CU生成RRC消息发送给终端设备，例如所述RRC消息可以为随机接入第四消息(MSG4)，即RRC connection setup消息，具体的，CU把所述RRC消息通过CU和DU之间的的DL RRC message transfer消息发送所述系统信息请求响应给终端设备，DU转发所述RRC消息给UE；
或者，该系统信息请求响应信息可以通过MAC CE消息发送：由DU生成MAC CE消息，那么在此之前可以由CU通过和DU的F1接口消息把系统信息请求响应发送给DU，例如，通过CU发送system information command消息给DU，或者是其他新消息，本申请不限定，所述消息中要增加终端设备的标识信息(UE ID)，用于指示所述系统信息请求响应响应是给哪个终端设备的，DU收到后，把所述响应包括在MAC头中，通过MAC CE发送给终端设备。
还应理解，该Command消息，为system information command消息。
还应理解，bitmap指示可以是CU生成，也可以是DU生成。
如果是CU生成，CU生成的bitmap指示信息可以是通过RRC消息发送给终端设备，或者由CU通过F1接口先把所述bitmap指示信息发送给DU，由DU通过MAC CE发送给终端设备，同响应信息发送过程。
如果是DU生成，那么DU收到CU在system information delivery消息中发送的系统信息后，生成bitmap指示信息，然后由DU把所述bitmap指示信息增加在MAC报头中通过MAC CE中发送给终端设备，同响应信息发送过程。
需要说明的是，如果有bitmap指示信息，那么系统信息请求响应信息可选。
还应理解，冲突解决标识信息(CRID)也可以是CU生成，也可以是DU生成，并通过RRC消息或者MAC CE方式发送给终端设备，同bitmap指示信息发送过程。
还需要说明的是，对于DU确定终端设备使用MSG1还是MSG3或者CU确定终端设备使用MSG1还是MSG3，或者是使用其他方式确定使用MSG1还是MSG3请求系统信息或者系统信息块，所述终端设备基于MSG1或者MSG3请求系统信息或者系统信息块时的系统信息请求响应和bitmap指示的发送方式均可以采用上述方式。本申请不限定。
图11示出了根据本申请实施例的传输方法500的示意性流程图，如图11所示，该传输方法500中的第一网络节点可以为图1中的第一网络节点，还可以为图2中的DU，该传输方法500中的第二网络节点可以为图1中的第二网络节点，还可以为图2中的CU，该方法500包括：
S510，第二网络节点确定终端设备使用第一消息请求系统信息或系统信息块，该第一消息为随机接入第一消息或者随机接入第三消息，该第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种；
S520，该第二网络节点向第一网络节点发送第三指示信息，该第一网络节点接收来自于该第二网络节点的该第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示该第一网络节点向该终端设备发送第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备使用该第一消息请求系统信息或系统信息块，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；
应理解，该终端设备根据该第四指示信息，向该第一网络节点请求系统信息或者系统信息块；或者，该终端设备根据该第四指示信息，向该第二网络节点请求系统信息或者系统信息块。
具体而言，该第二网络节点首先确定该终端设备使用MSG1或者MSG3来请求SI或者SIB，该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点发送第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示该第一网络节点向该终端设备发送第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示使用MSG1或者MSG3请求系统信息或者系统信息块。
可选地，该第一消息为随机接入第一消息，该第三指示信息还用于指示至少一个系统信息和随机接入前导序列的映射关系。
例如，CU确定终端设备使用MSG1还是MSG3，CU确定后发送第三指示信息给DU，第三指示信息包括系统信息和前导序列的映射关系或系统信息块和前导序列的映射关系，DU收到之后在系统消息(例如SIB1)中增加所述指示信息并发送给该终端设备。
可选地，该第一消息为随机接入第一消息，该第四指示信息还用于指示至少一个系统信息和随机接入前导序列的映射关系。
例如，CU确定终端设备使用MSG1还是MSG3，CU确定后发送第三指示信息给DU，第三指示信息指示是MSG1还是MSG3，如0，1等，DU收到后识别出MSG1还是MSG3，如果是MSG1，那么DU构建第四指示信息，第四指示信息包括系统信息和前导序列的映射关系或系统信息块和前导序列的映射关系，然后DU在系统消息中增加所述第四指示信息并发送给该终端设备。
可选地，该第一消息为随机接入第三消息，该第三指示信息还用于该第一网络节点向该终端设备指示使用该随机接入第三消息请求系统信息，或者，该第三指示信息用于该第一网络节点向该终端设备指示使用该随机接入第三消息请求系统信息块。
例如，CU确定终端设备使用MSG1还是MSG3，对于使用MSG3的，进一步还可以指示使用MSG3的系统信息的请求的是SI还是SIB，并发送指示给DU，DU收到后把所述指示发送给该终端设备。
可选地，该第二网络节点确定该终端设备使用MSG1向该第一网络节点请求SI/SIB，该方法500还包括：
该第一网络节点向该终端设备发送系统信息请求响应信息，该终端设备接收该第一网络节点发送的系统信息请求响应信息。
可选地，该第二网络节点确定该终端设备使用MSG1向该第二网络节点请求SI/SIB，该方法500还包括：
该第一网络节点向该终端设备发送bitmap指示信息，该终端设备接收该第一网络节点发送的bitmap指示信息，该bitmap指示信息用于指示发给该终端设备的系统信息。
应理解，该终端设备基于MSG1请求系统信息或者系统信息块时，如果多个终端设备同时请求了不同的SI/SIB，那么该第一网络节点收到该请求后，发送系统信息请求响应，所述系统信息请求响应中包括响应信息(如ack)和bitmap指示的至少一种，所述bitmap指示用于指示哪些SI/SIB已经广播，具体的：
所述系统信息请求响应可以包含在媒体接入控制层MAC报头中，由第一网络节点通过媒体接入控制层控制元素MAC CE发送给该终端设备；
或者，所述系统信息请求响应可以包含在系统消息/系统信息中，由第一网络节点通过系统广播消息发送给该终端设备；
可选地，该第二网络节点确定该终端设备使用MSG3向该第二网络节点请求SI/SIB，该方法500还包括：
该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点发送系统信息请求响应信息，该第一网络节点接收该第二网络节点发送的系统信息请求响应信息并发送给该终端设备；或者，该第二网络节点通过第一网络节点向终端设备转发系统信息请求响应信息，该终端设备接收该第一网络节点发送的系统信息请求响应信息。
可选地，该第二网络节点确定该终端设备使用MSG3向该第二网络节点请求SI/SIB，该方法500还包括：
该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点发送bitmap指示信息，该第一网络节点接收该第二网络节点发送的bitmap指示信息并发送给该终端设备；或者，该第二网络节点通过第一网络节点向该终端设备转发bitmap指示信息，该终端设备接收该第一网络节点发送的bitmap指示信息，该bitmap指示信息用于指示发给该终端设备的系统信息或系统信息块。
应理解，该终端设备基于MSG3请求系统信息或者系统信息块时，如果多个终端设备同时请求了不同的SI/SIB，那么该第二网络节点收到该请求后，发送系统信息请求响应，并在请求响应中包括系统信息请求响应信息(如ack)，所述响应用于指示该终端设备所请求的系统信息已经响应并即将广播，可选的，所述系统信息响应请求中还可以包括一个bitmap指示，所述bitmap指示用于指示哪些SI/SIB已经广播。还应理解，该系统信息响应请求中包含的系统信息请求响应、冲突解决标识以及bitmap指示信息的传输方式与方法400中的类似，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
该系统信息响应请求中包括的bitmap指示可以包含在RRC消息中，那么该第二网络节点发起RRC消息携带所述bitmap指示并通过该第一网络节点转发给该终端设备；
或者，该系统信息响应请求中还可以包含在该第一网络节点的媒体接入控制层MAC报头中，由该第一网络节点通过媒体接入控制层控制元素(MAC CE)中由该第一网络节点发送给该终端设备，此时，所述bitmap指示可以是由第一网络节点生成并增加在MAC报头中，即第一网络节点根据第二网络节点发送的所请求的系统信息来生成bitmap指示，或者，也可以是由第二网络节点生成，然后该第二网络节点可以通过接口消息八把该系统信息响应请求中发送该第一网络节点，此时该接口消息还可以需要指示具体的终端设备的标识信息(UE ID)，该第一网络节点收到后把所述bitmap指示增加在所述MAC报头中并通过MAC CE发送给该终端设备。具体的，所述bitmap指示可以是类似0100形式，其他可能形式本申请不限定。
需要说明的是，上述系统信息响应请求中中也可以只包括bitmap指示，不包括响应信息(ack)。
还需要说明的是，对于CU确定终端设备使用MSG1还是MSG3或者DU确定终端设备使用MSG1还是MSG3，或者是使用其他方式确定使用MSG1还是MSG3请求系统信息或者系统信息块，所述终端设备基于MSG1或者MSG3请求系统信息或者系统信息块时的系统信息请求响应和bitmap指示的发送方式均可以采用上述方式。本申请不限定。
上文结合图10和图11，详细得描述了根据本申请实施例的方法400和方法500，方 法400和方法500分别通过第一网络节点和第二网络节点来确定终端设备请求系统信息或者系统信息块的方式，下面结合图12，详细得描述根据本申请实施例的传输方法600，方法600主要介绍网络设备之间互相请求资源状态的流程。
图12示出了根据本申请实施例的传输方法600的示意性流程图，如图12所示，该传输方法600中的第一网络节点可以为图1中的第一网络节点，还可以为图2中的DU，该传输方法600中的第二网络节点可以为图1中的第二网络节点，还可以为图2中的CU，该方法600包括：
S610，第一网络节点向第二网络节点发送第一资源状态信息，该第一资源状态信息包括物理资源块、硬件负载和几乎空白子帧中的至少一种，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种，该第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种；
S620，该第二网络节点向该第三网络节点发送第二资源状态信息，该第二资源状态信息包括物理资源块、硬件负载、几乎空白子帧、传输网络层负载、可用容量、参考信号接收功率测量报告、信道状态信息报告中的至少一种。
具体而言，该第一网络节点可以周期性的主动向该第二网络节点上报该第一网络节点测得的该第一资源状态信息，所述周期可以由第二网络节点配置或者也可以由第一网络节点预配置，该第一资源状态信息包括物理资源块(Physical Resource Block，PRB)、硬件负载(HW load)和几乎空白子帧(Almost Blank Subframe，ABS)中的至少一种，该第二网络节点确定传输网络层负载、可用容量、参考信号接收功率测量报告、信道状态信息报告中的至少一种，随后该第二网络节点向该第三网络节点上报该第二资源状态信息，该第二资源状态信息包括物理资源块、硬件负载、几乎空白子帧、传输网络层负载(TNL load)、可用容量(Composite Available Capacity)、参考信号接收功率(Reference Signal Receiving Power，RSRP)测量报告、信道状态信息(Channel Status Information，CSI)报告中的至少一种。
应理解，该第一网络节点可以为图3中的gNB1-DU，该第二网络节点可以为图3中的gNB1-CU，该第三网络节点可以为图3中的gNB2，或者，该第三网络节点为图3中gNB2的CU。
可选地，该第一网络节点向第二网络节点发送第一资源状态信息之前，该方法600还包括：
S601，该第二网络节点接收该第三网络节点发送的第二资源状态请求消息，该第二资源请求消息用于请求该第二资源状态信息；
S602，该第二网络节点向第一网络节点发送第一资源状态请求消息，第一资源状态请求消息用于请求该第一资源状态信息。
具体而言，该第三网络节点可以向该第二网络节点请求该第二资源状态信息，该第二资源状态信息包括物理资源块、硬件负载、几乎空白子帧、传输网络层负载、可用容量、参考信号接收功率测量报告、信道状态信息报告中的至少一种，该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点请求该第一资源状态信息。
可选地，该传输方法600还包括：
该第三网络节点向该第二网络节点发送第三资源状态信息，该第二网络节点接收该第 三网络节点发送的该第三资源状态信息，该第三资源状态信息包括物理资源块、硬件负载、几乎空白子帧、传输网络层负载、可用容量、参考信号接收功率测量报告、信道状态信息报告中的至少一种；
该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点发送该第三网络节点的第四资源状态信息，该第一网络节点接收来自于该第二网络节点的第三网络节点的第四资源状态信息，该第四资源状态信息包括物理资源块、硬件负载和几乎空白子帧中的至少一种。
具体而言，该第三网络节点可以向该第二网络节点请求该第二资源状态信息，也可以向该第二网络节点发送该第三网络节点的第三资源状态信息，该第二网络节点收到该第三网络节点的第三资源状态信息后，向该第一网络节点发送该第一网络节点发送该第四资源状态信息，该第一网络节点可以根据该第四资源状态信息进行负载相关的工作，如协调等。
本申请实施例的传输方法，通过第一网络节点向第二网络节点发送资源状态信息，有助于解决网络设备之间资源状态相互请求的问题。
图13示出了根据本申请实施例的传输方法700的示意性流程图，如图13所述，该传输方法700中的第一网络节点可以为图1中的第一网络节点，还可以为图2中的DU，该传输方法700中的第二网络节点可以为图1中的第二网络节点，还可以为图2中的CU，该方法700包括：
S710，终端设备生成第二消息，该第二消息消息包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备请求系统信息，或者，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备请求建立RRC连接；
或者，终端设备生成的第二消息，该第二消息承载在第一逻辑信道或者第二逻辑信息，该第一逻辑信息用于承载请求系统信息的消息，该第二逻辑信道用于承载请求RRC连接的消息。
或者，终端设备生成第二消息，所述第二消息使用第一逻辑信道标识或者第二逻辑信道标识，所述第一逻辑信道标识用于识别请求系统信息的消息，所述第二逻辑信道标识用于识别请求RRC连接的消息；
具体而言，该终端设备首先生成RRC消息，该RRC消息包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备请求系统信息，或者，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备请求建立RRC连接。
或者，还可以通过逻辑信道来区别终端设备发送的消息是请求系统信息的，还是请求RRC连接的。
或者，还可以通过逻辑信道标识来区别终端设备发送的消息是请求系统信息的，还是请求RRC连接的。
应理解，该RRC消息也可以称为公共控制信道(Common Control Channel，CCCH)消息，CCCH用于承载该RRC消息，CCCH可以承载的RRC消息包括但不限于：RRC重置(resume)消息、RRC重建立消息、RRC连接建立请求消息和系统信息请求消息。其中，RRC重置(resume)消息、RRC重建立消息、RRC连接建立请求消息可以归类为第一类RRC消息，第一类RRC消息用于请求建立RRC连接；系统信息请求消息可以归类为第二类RRC消息，第二类RRC消息用于请求系统信息，如该系统信息请求消息可以为MSG3。
图14示出了一种RRC消息的MAC协议层示意图。
可选地，该终端设备在MAC头中加入该第四指示信息，如图14所示，可以在R字段或者F字段中增加指示信息(如0，1)，例如0代表第一类RRC消息，1代表第二类RRC消息。
可选地，该终端设备使用新的逻辑信道或逻辑信道标识发送系统信息请求消息，即系统信息请求消息使用的所述逻辑信道或逻辑信道标识是不同于其他RRC连接建立消息使用的逻辑信道或逻辑信道标识
应理解，对于终端设备使用新的逻辑信道标识发送系统信息请求消息时，该终端设备在MAC头中携带新的逻辑信道标识(Logical Channel Identify，LCID)，该LCID是终端设备在发起RRC消息时增加在RRC消息的MAC头中，该新的LCID可以是由协议定义或者由基站配置等其他方式获得，本申请不限定。
应理解，对于终端设备使用新的逻辑信道发送系统信息请求消息时，该RRC消息可以应用新的CCCE配置信息，里面具有新的LCID，该新的LCID可以由协议预定义，该新的CCCE配置可以在新的信令无线承载(SRB)中传输，也可以在现有的SRB0上传输。
表19示出了一种新的CCCH配置，如表19所示。
表19一种CCCH的配置
Figure PCTCN2019071060-appb-000001
可选地，该终端设备在RLC头中加入该第四指示信息，该第四指示信息是该终端设备发起RRC消息时增加在RRC消息的RLC头中。
可选地，该第四指示信息为所述第二消息的消息类型message type识别信息，该message type识别信息用于识别该RRC消息为第一类RRC消息或者第二类RRC消息，具体的，所述message type包括第一类RRC消息和第二类RRC消息中的其中一种。
应理解，该第一类RRC消息包括但不限于上述三种，该第一类RRC消息还可以能有其他的用途，例如，该第一类RRC消息可以用于请求除系统信息以外的其他请求，本申请实施例旨在区别请求系统信息的RRC消息和其他RRC消息。
S720，该终端设备向该第一网络节点发送该第二消息，该第一网络节点接收来自于该 终端设备的该第二消息；
S730，该第一网络节点向该第二网络节点发送第三消息，该第二网络节点接收该第一网络节点发送的该第三消息，该第三消息包括第一容器，该第一容器中的内容可以指示该终端设备需要请求系统信息或者系统信息块，或者，可以指示该终端设备需要RRC连接建立等其他用途，该第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
具体的，所述第三消息可以是initial UL RRC message transfer消息，所述第一容器为RRC-container，所述第一容器中的RRC-container中包括终端设备的RRC消息的消息类型和消息内容的至少一种，第二网络节点收到所述第三消息后，根据第三消息的目的，即根据第三消息中包括的第一容器中包括的内容可以获知所述第三消息的目的是用于请求系统信息或者是建立RRC连接，例如RRC connection setup或者RRC connection re-establish或者RRC connection resume等，具体的，该第二网络节点可以根据第一容器中包括的消息类型来确认第三消息或者第二消息的目的。
可选的，如果S721执行了，即第一网络节点识别出了第二消息的类型，即RRC消息的类型，第一网络节点也可以增加一个指示，指示第二网络节点第二消息的类型(所述第二消息的类型包括用于请求系统信息或者是建立RRC连接，例如系统信息请求、系统信息块请求、RRC connection setup、RRC connection re-establish、RRC connection resume的至少一种)，从而使得第二网络节点收到该第三消息后直接识别出该第三消息的目的(所述目的包括用于请求系统信息或者是建立RRC连接，例如系统信息请求、系统信息块请求、RRC connection setup、RRC connection re-establish、RRC connection resume的至少一种)。
可选地，该第一网络节点向该第二网络节点发送第三消息之前，该方法700还包括：
S721，该第一网络节点识别该第二消息。
具体而言，该第一网络节点在收到该第二消息后，对该第二消息进行识别，例如，可以识别该第二消息的MAC协议层，若R字段为1，则确定该第二消息用于请求SI/SIB，若R字段为0，则确定该RRC消息是其他用途；或者，识别第二消息的MAC协议层中的LCID，若LCID是协议定义的用于请求系统信息的LCID(如LCID为10100/110111)，则确定该第二消息用于请求SI/SIB，否则，则确定该第二消息是其他用途；或者，识别第二消息中是新逻辑信道传输过来的还是其他逻辑信道传输过来的，若是新逻辑信道传输过来的(新逻辑信道可以是协议定义，如LCID为4，即对应SRB4)，则确定该第二消息用于请求SI/SIB，否则，则确定该第二消息是其他用途。
应理解，该第二消息可以为RRC消息，该第三消息可以为UL RRC message transfer消息，该RRC消息可以作为一个Container封装在该UL RRC message transfer消息中发送该第二网络节点。
可选地，该第一网络节点具有部分RRC功能，则该第一网络节点通过识别该终端设备发送的RRC消息中的message type，可以确定该RRC消息是用于请求SI/SIB或者用于其他用途。
例如，该第一网络节点为DU，该第二网络节点为CU，DU在识别出该RRC消息是用于请求SI/SIB后，直接向CU发送该initial UL RRC message消息，该initial UL RRC  message消息中可以不包括DU to CU RRC Container(该DU to CU RRC Container用于CU触发建立SRB1)。
又例如，DU在识别出该RRC消息是用于请求SI/SIB后，进行该RRC消息的准入控制，即DU具有对系统信息请求的准入控制功能，如果DU不允许该RRC消息接入，则一种方式是DU直接发送拒绝指示信息给该终端设备，该拒绝指示信息包括在MAC CE中；另一种方式是，DU不允许该RRC消息接入，DU向CU发送拒绝指示信息，然后CU通过RRC消息告知该终端设备。
可选地，该第一网络节点向该第二网络节点发送第三消息之前，该方法700还包括：
S722，该第一网络节点对该RRC消息进行准入控制。
具体的，该RRC消息包括第一类RRC消息和第二类RRC消息，所述准入控制策略对第一类和第二类RRC消息都相同。
应理解，该第一网络节点可以在S721之后进行S722，也可以只进行S721，还可以只进行S722，还可以S721和S722都不进行。
需要说明的是，如果S721和S722都不进行，那么S710中终端设备生成的第二消息中可以不用包括第四指示信息，或者，该终端设备可以使用相同的逻辑信道承载该第二消息，或者，该终端设备可以使用相同的逻辑信道标识来标识该第二消息。
例如，DU可以不进行RRC消息的识别，对所有RRC消息都进行准入控制，如果DU不允许准入，则直接发起initial UL RRC message消息到CU，所述intial UL RRC message消息中包括RRC container，但不包括DU to CU RRC Container，CU收到所述消息后，通过所述intial UL RRC message消息中包括的RRC container中的内容(例如，message type)识别所述RRC消息的消息类型，判断是否是进行系统信息或者系统信息块请求，如果不是系统信息或者系统信息块请求的RRC消息，CU确定该RRC消息不包括DU to CU RRC Container，则CU发送拒绝指示信息通过DU发送给该终端设备。否则，如果CU通过RRC container中的内容(例如，message type)识别出所述RRC消息是系统消息请求，则进行系统消息请求响应。
又例如，DU可以进行RRC消息的识别，DU识别出该RRC消息是系统信息请求时，允许准入，则发送一条新定义的消息(例如，SI request message transfer)来传递所述RRC消息，所述新定义的消息包括CGI和RRC Container(RRC Container中包括了message type)，CU收到后就可以识别该新定义的消息是用于请求SI，进一步的，CU还需要通过RRC Container中包括的系统信息请求的内容来识别终端设备所请求的SI/SIB是哪一个。
S740，该第二网络节点确定该第三消息包括第一容器，所述第一容器的信息指示所述终端设备需要请求系统信息或者系统信息块；
S750，该第二网络节点向该第一网络节点发送系统信息请求响应信息、bitmap指示信息以及冲突解决标识中的至少一个，该第一网络节点接收该第二网络节点发送的系统信息请求响应信息、bitmap指示信息以及冲突解决标识中的至少一个并发送所述信息到终端设备，或者，该第二网络节点通过第一网络节点向终端设备转发系统信息请求响应信息、bitmap指示信息以及冲突解决标识中的至少一个，所述bitmap指示信息用于指示发送给终端设备的系统信息或系统信息块。
可选地，该第二网络节点确定该第三消息包括第一容器，该第一容器中的消息类型指 示该终端设备是请求RRC连接，不是请求系统信息或者系统信息块，则该第二网络节点还要确定该第三消息不包括第二容器，该第二容器为该第一网络节点到该第二网络节点的RRC容器(即第一网络节点到第二网络节点的RRC信息)，则该第二网络节点通过第一网络节点向终端设备发送拒绝指示信息，其中，拒绝指示信息中包括拒绝指示的消息类型。
具体的，所述第三消息是initial UL RRC message transfer，所述第一容器为RRC-container，所述第二容器是DU to CU RRC container或者DU to CU RRC information信元。
其中，所述第三消息的目的是用于传输层3消息(如DL CCCH消息，或者RRC消息，或者系统信息请求)，可以理解，所述第三消息的目的是用于建立RRC连接或者系统信息请求，其中建立RRC连接包括RRC连接建立消息(RRCconnectionreestablishment)、RRC连接建立拒绝消息(RRCconnectionreestablishmentreject)、RRC连接建立消息(RRCconnectionsetup)、RRC连接拒绝消息(RRCconnectionreject)、RRC重置消息(RRC resume)的至少一种；系统信息请求包括系统信息请求(system information request)以及系统信息块请求(system information block request))中的至少一种。
所述第一容器包括终端设备的CCCH消息和RRC消息的至少一种，其中，终端设备的CCCH消息和RRC消息均可以包括消息类型和消息内容的至少一种，其中，消息类型包括RRC连接建立消息(RRCconnectionreestablishment)、RRC连接建立拒绝消息(RRCconnectionreestablishmentreject)、RRC连接建立消息(RRCconnectionsetup)、RRC连接拒绝消息(RRCconnectionreject)、RRC重置消息(RRC resume)、系统信息请求(system information request)以及系统信息块请求(system information block request))中的至少一种，消息内容和消息类型具体类似现有LTE或NR技术中的CCCH消息或RRC消息，本申请不限定；可以理解，所述第三消息的目的是可以根据第三消息中的第一容器的信息确定的，或者可以通过第三消息中的其他信元确定，本申请不限定。
所述第二容器包括SRB1(signaling radio bearer，信令承载)的配置信息。
该第二网络节点根据第三消息的目的确定是否要拒绝终端设备的请求，具体的，该第二网络节点根据该第三消息包括的该第一容器中的内容识别出的消息目的是请求RRC连接(例如，RRC connection setup或者RRC connection re-establish或者RRC connection resume)，则如果第三消息中不包括第二容器，在第一网络节点不能服务所述终端设备的假设下该第二网络节点拒绝终端设备，可选的，该第二网络节点通过第一网络节点向终端设备发送拒绝指示信息，其中，拒绝指示信息中可以包括拒绝指示的消息类型。
例如，CU收到DU发送的第三消息，CU通过该第三消息识别出该第三消息是系统信息请求消息，具体地，CU通过该第三消息的RRC container中的内容(如，RRC消息类型message type)识别出所述RRC消息是系统信息请求消息，则进行系统消息请求响应。
又例如，CU收到DU发送的第三消息，CU通过该第三消息识别出该第三消息时系统信息请求消息，具体地，CU通过该第三消息的RRC container中的内容(如，RRC消息类型message type)识别出所述RRC消息是第一类RRC消息，即为RRC connection setup或re-establish或resume的RRC消息，即可以理解RRC消息所对应的message type为RRC connection setup或re-establish或resume的消息类型(如识别出该RRC消息不是用于系统信息请求)，而且CU识别出第三消息中不包括DU to CU RRC Container(或者，DU to CU  RRC information)，则在DU不能服务所述终端设备的假设下拒绝所述终端设备，即CU拒绝该终端设备的该RRC消息，例如CU通过DU发送拒绝指示信息给终端设备，具体的，CU可以通过DL RRC message transfer消息把所述拒绝指示信息发送给DU，DU再发送给终端设备。
对于CU通过RRC container中的内容(例如，message type)识别出所述RRC消息是用于系统信息请求，或者CU通过DU发送的SI request message transfer消息识别出所述RRC消息是用于系统信息请求，则CU要通过DU给终端设备发送系统信息请求响应。具体地，CU把所述系统信息请求响应信息(ack)放在RRC connection setup消息中，所述RRC connection setup消息可以封装在DL RRC message transfer消息由CU发送给DU，然后再由DU把所述RRC connection setup消息发送给终端设备。
可选的，如果CU需要进行冲突解决(即CU准入了终端设备的RRC连接建立)，还需要把冲突解决标识(CRID)发送给该终端设备，具体的，所述冲突解决标识可以携带在所述RRC connection setup消息中，或者，也可以在一条新的消息中发送，具体发送方式与系统信息请求响应的发送方式相同，此处不再赘述。
可选地，CU也可以先把系统信息请求响应或者CRID通过DU和CU的F1接口消息发送给DU(如system information delivery command消息，或者其他现有接口消息或新消息，本申请不限定)，再由DU把所述冲突解决标识加在MAC头中通过MAC CE发送给该终端设备。
或者，对于系统消息请求的RRC消息，CU可以不发送上述响应信息和CRID，CU通过DU发送一个bitmap(例如，other SIs中有4个SI，SIB有22个，那么对于系统信息请求的是SI，则bitmap指示可以是0110，0代表没有广播，1代表系统信息已经广播，所述0110的位置与SI的编号一一对应，如果系统信息请求的是SIB，则bitmap指示可以是一串22位的01指示，0代表没有广播，1代表系统信息已经广播，所述22位的位置与SIB的编号一一对应)到终端设备，所述bitmap用于指示哪些系统信息或系统信息块被请求了，所述bitmap指示可以通过CU的RRC消息发送，或者，CU也可以先把bitmap指示先通过CU和DU之间的F1接口消息(如system information delivery command消息)发送给DU，消息中需要携带终端设备的标识，再由DU把所述bitmap指示增加在MAC报头中通过MAC CE发送给终端设备，具体同系统信息请求响应信息和冲突解决标识的发送方式相同，这里不再赘述。
本申请实施例的传输方法，通过该第二网络节点识别第三消息中的RRC容器，从而确定终端设备是否请求系统信息，避免了该第二网络节点直接拒绝终端设备请求系统信息。
应理解，本申请实施例中，DU和CU之间的消息，如initial UL RRC message trasfer、DL RRC message transfer、UL RRC message transfer都是用来传递终端设备的RRC消息的，所传递的RRC消息中的RRC container中均会包括message type，用于说明终端设备的RRC消息是什么消息，如RRC connection setup消息、SI请求消息等等。
图15示出了根据本申请实施例的传输方法800的示意性流程图，如图15所示，该传输方法800包括：
S801，终端设备与第一网络节点和第三网络节点连接并可以从第一网络节点和第三网 络节点传输/接收数据。
可选地，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种。
可选地，该第三网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；
应理解，该第一网络节点可以为DU1，该第三网络节点可以为DU2，UE与DU1和DU2连接并发送/接收数据可以存在以下两种场景：
场景一：UE与DU1和DU2具有连接，但DU1和DU2与UE建立的承载是不同的承载。这种场景下，当DU1发生无线链路问题之后，如果数据要转到DU2传输，那么CU需要通过DU2与UE建立相关承载。
场景二：UE与DU1和DU2具有连接，DU2属于DU1的备份链路，与UE建立的是相同的承载。或者，DU2与DU1与UE建立的承载有部分相同，部分不同，本申请对此不作任何限定。
还应理解，如果UE和DU1和DU2没有同时有连接，那么当CU-CP决定更换DU进行数传的时候，还需要与新的DU建立承载信息，具体的，如通过UE context setup/modification的相关流程进行。
S802，第一网络节点发现自己的无线链路出现问题。
具体而言，DU1的无线链路问题的确定是通过DU的实现，本申请对此不作任何限定。
S803，第一网络节点向用户面节点发送第一通知消息，用户面节点接收该第一网络节点发送的该第一通知消息。
具体而言，DU1通过F1-U接口，向CU-UP发送第一通知消息(无线链路问题通知消息，即radio link outage通知消息)，CU-UP通过F1-U接口接收DU1发送的第一通知消息。
应理解，所述第一通知消息可以是通过DDDS PDU来传输，即作为数据无线承载DDDS(DL DATA DELIVERY STATUS)PDU的一部分，或者也可以是其他现有的PDU的一部分，或者是新定义的PDU，或者是新定义的PDU的一部分，本申请对此不作任何限定。其中通知消息中还可以包括丢失的数据包的SN号，如Number of lost F1-U Sequence Number ranges reported，对应于DU1还没有传输的PDCP PDUs。
需要说明的是，需要说明的是由于此处radio link outage通知消息是通过F1-U接口发送的，因此消息是发送给CU-UP的，因为CU-UP和DU具有用户面的接口。
应理解，F1-U接口的消息是DDDS(DL DATA DELIVERY STATUS)PDU，具体的，所述消息中包括上行/下行radio link outage通知，或者也可以是F1-U接口的其他现有消息，或者是新消息，本申请对此不作任何限定。需要说明的是，上行/下行radio link outage通知可以是原因值，也可以是其它指示，本申请在此不作限定。
S804，用户面节点向控制面节点发送该第一通知消息，控制面节点接收用户面节点发送的该第一通知消息。
应理解，该用户面节点可以为CU-UP，该控制面节点可以为CU-CP。
具体而言，CU-UP可以通过E1 AP接口消息发送该第一通知消息。
应理解，所述CU-UP收到所述DDDS PDU之后，读取第一通知消息，如读取原因值 获知是DU的无线链路出现问题了，那么CU-UP把所述第一通知消息携带在E1 AP接口消息中发送给CU-CP。
还应理解，具体的，所述E1 AP消息可以是UE bearer setup/modification request/response消息或UE bearer modification required/confirm消息等，或者也可以是现有E1 AP其他消息，或者是新消息，本申请对此不作任何限定。
S805，控制面节点接收到该第一通知消息后，确定是否更换该第一网络节点。
具体而言，CU-CP接收到该第一通知消息后，确定是否更换DU，即决策是否从DU1更换为DU2传输数据，或者是否通过DU2重传DU1没有传输成功的数据等，本申请在此不作限定。
应理解，CU-CP通过DU1之间与UE传输的链路可以不取消(后续此链路还可能恢复，通过resume流程)，或者CU-CP通过DU1之间与UE传输的链路也可以取消(后续此链路恢复需要重建所述链路)。
还应理解，如果CU-CP决定更换的DU2尚没有为UE分配相关资源(即前文描述的场景一)，那么CU-CP还需要向DU2发起建立承载的相关流程，具体的：
CU-CP向DU2发送F1 AP消息UE context setup/modification request，向DU2请求建立待进行数据传输的相关承载，DU2收到消息后响应F1 AP UE context setup/modification response到CU-CP。
S806，控制面节点决策后，向用户面节点发送第一响应消息，该用户面节点结合该控制面节点发送的该第一响应消息。
例如，CU-CP决策后，向CU-UP发送第一响应消息，CU-UP接收CU-CP发送的第一响应消息，即CU-CP告知CU-UP决策结果(如更新DU、DU的标识等)。
具体而言，该第一响应消息可以通过E1 AP接口消息发送，所述E1 AP消息可以是UE bearer setup/modification/release request/response消息或UE bearer modification required/confirm消息等，或者也可以是现有E1 AP其他消息，或者是新消息，本申请对此不作任何限定。
应理解，该第一响应消息中包括更新DU的标识，所述DU的标识可以是识别cell ID，或者是其他可以识别DU的标识，本申请对此不作任何限定。
可选地，CU-UP收到该第一响应消息后，停止DU1传输数据。或者，CU-UP在S803时就停止DU1传输数据，本申请对此不作任何限定。
需要说明的是，本步骤可选，如果没有本步骤，那么用户面节点默认可以自己决策更改DU进行数据传输，即当用户面节点发送第一通知消息给控制面节点后，即直接决策更改DU进行数据传输，或者，用户面节点发送第一通知消息给控制面板节点的同时还发送决策更改的DU信息给控制面板节点，从而告知控制面板节点更换了数据传输的DU。
S807，控制面节点向第三网络节点发送第五指示信息，所述第五指示信息用于指示终端设备更换网络节点的结果。
CU-CP确定更换DU进行上行/下行的数据传输后，向DU2发送第五指示消息，该第五指示消息用于告知UE更换DU的结果；具体的，第五指示信息可以通过F1接口消息传递。
需要说明的是，本步骤可选，本步骤与其他步骤无顺序限制。
S808，第三网络节点向终端设备发送该第五指示信息，该终端设备接收该第三网络节点发送的该第五指示信息。
具体而言，CU-CP通过F1 AP消息(例如DL RRC message transfer消息)把更换DU的结果发送给UE(如通过DU2告知UE)，所述结果例如上行数据从DU2传输。
应理解，此步骤与其他步骤无顺序限制，可以在任意步骤之前或者之后进行。
还应理解，如果当radio link outage的指示是上行传输出现问题的指示，那么CU-CP可能会决策源DU1继续进行下行数据的传输，DU2进行上行数据的传输，此时，CU-CP需要把此决策告知UE，即指示UE进行上行传输的DU，从而UE知道上下行数据的走向。
还应理解，如果当radio link outage的指示是下行传输出现问题的指示，那么CU-CP可能会决策所有上下行数据都从DU2进行传输，此时，CU-CP需要把此决策告知UE，即指示UE进行上行或下行传输的DU，从而UE知道上下行数据的走向。
统一而言，所述第五指示消息是通过CU-CP通过RRC消息发送给UE，具体的，所述指示可以是上行传输的DU的标识、上行传输的小区的标识、上行传输的小区组(cellgroup)标识、上行传输的SCG的标识中的至少一种，本申请对此并不作任何限定。
需要说明的是，本步骤可选，本步骤与其他步骤无顺序限制。
S809，用户面节点向该第三网络节点发送数据，该第三网络节点接收该用户面面节点发送的数据。
例如，CU-UP开始发送新的PDU数据或者重传的PDU数据到DU2，通过DU2发送至UE。
S810，当该第一网络节点的无线链路恢复时，该第一网络节点向该用户面节点发送第二通知消息。
例如，如果DU1发现无线链路恢复，则发送第二通知消息(例如，无线链路恢复radio link resume通知消息)到CU-UP，CU-UP接收该DU1发送的该第二通知消息。
具体而言，所述第二通知消息是通过F1-U用户面接口发送的，类似radio link outage的通知。F1-U接口的消息是DDDS(DL DATA DELIVERY STATUS)PDU，即作为数据无线承载DDDS(DL DATA DELIVERY STATUS)PDU的一部分，或者也可以是其他现有的PDU的一部分，或者是新定义的PDU，或者是新定义的PDU的一部分，本申请对此不作任何限定。具体的，所述消息中包括上行/下行radio link resume的原因值，或者也可以是F1-U接口的其他现有消息，或者是新消息，本申请对此不作任何限定。
S811，该用户面节点向该控制面节点发送该第二通知消息，该控制面节点接收该用户面节点发送的该第二通知消息。
例如，CU-UP收到第二通知消息后，通过E1接口转发所述第二通知消息到CU-CP，从而使得CP决策是否恢复数据传输的DU。
应理解，所述CU-UP收到所述DDDS PDU之后，读取原因值获知是DU的无线链路恢复了，那么CU-UP把所述信息携带在E1 AP接口消息中发送给CU-CP。
还应理解，所述E1 AP消息可以是UE bearer setup/modification/release request/response消息或UE bearer modification required/confirm消息等，或者也可以是现有E1 AP其他消息，或者是新消息，本申请对此不作任何限定。
可选地，CU-UP收到响应后，停止DU2传输数据，或者，CU-UP在S810时就停止 DU2传输数据，本申请对此不作任何限定。
S812，该控制面节点向该用户面节点发送第二响应消息，该用户面节点接收该控制面节点发送的该第二响应消息。
例如，CU-CP决策后，向CU-UP发送第二响应消息，CU-UP接收CU-CP发送的该第二响应消息，即告知UP决策结果(如恢复DU、DU的标识等)，该第二响应消息可以通过E1 AP接口消息发送。
具体而言，所述E1 AP消息可以是UE bearer setup/modification/release request/response消息或UE bearer modification required/confirm消息等，或者也可以是现有E1 AP其他消息，或者是新消息，本申请对此不作任何限定。
应理解，该第二响应消息中包括恢复DU的标识，所述DU的标识可以是识别cell ID，或者是其他可以识别DU的标识，本申请对此不作任何限定。或者也可以直接是恢复指示，即UP提前存储了源DU，一旦收到恢复指示即可以知道恢复哪一个DU传输数据。
需要说明的是，本步骤可选，如果没有本步骤，那么用户面节点默认可以自己决策恢复DU进行数据传输，即当用户面节点发送第一通知消息给控制面节点后，即直接决策恢复DU进行数据传输，或者，用户面节点发送第一通知消息给控制面板节点的同时还发送决策恢复的DU信息给控制面板节点，从而告知控制面板节点恢复了数据传输的DU。
S813，该用户面节点向该第一网络节点发送数据，该第一网络节点接收该用户面节点发送的数据。
例如，CU-UP恢复数传DU后，发送新的PDU或者重传的PDU通过DU1传输给UE。
具体而言，CU-UP可以决策恢复DU1的上下行数传。
可选的，控制面板节点还可以通过第三网络节点或者第一网络节点告知UE数据传输节点恢复为第一网络节点。
目前现有技术中，对于CU-DU架构，DU的无线链路问题的确定属于DU的实现，DU确认无线链路故障/恢复后通过DU与CU之间的接口发送所述指示给CU，具体的，DU可以通过用户面或者控制面协议来发送所述无线链路问题，CU收到后决策是否更换DU，如果更换DU了，则CU通过新的DU与UE进行数传。但现有技术中只解决了CU-DU架构下的无线链路问题的指示问题，现有技术无法解决CP-UP架构下无线链路问题的指示，本申请实施例主要解决的就是在CP-UP架构下，CP获取无线链路故障/恢复的方法。
本申请实施例的无线通信的方法，有助于解决CP-UP架构下无线链路故障/恢复的指示问题。
上文结合图15介绍了本申请实施例的传输方法800，图15中无线链路失败指示是通过F1-U用户面接口传输，下面结合图16，详细描述根据本申请实施例的传输方法900，方法900中无线链路失败指示可以通过F1-C控制面节口传输，如果无线链路问题指示是通过F1-C控制面接口传输的过程，那么DU可以通过F1 AP消息(例如UE context setup/modification/release request/response/required/confirm消息等)发送所述指示到CU-CP，如图16所示，该方法900包括：
S901，终端设备与第一网络节点和第三网络节点连接并可以从第一网络节点和第三网络节点传输/接收数据。
例如，UE与DU1和DU2连接并可以从DU1和DU2传输/接收数据。
S902，第一网络节点发现自己的无线链路出现问题。
例如，DU1发现自己的无线链路出现问题。
应理解，S901-S902与S801-S802过程类似，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
S903，该第一网络节点向该控制面节点发送第一通知消息，该控制面节点接收该第一网络节点发送的该第一通知消息。
例如，DU1通过F1-C接口，向CU-CP发送第一通知消息(radio link outage通知消息)，CU-CP通过F1-C接口接收来自于DU1的该第一通知消息。
具体而言，可以通过F1 AP消息，如UE context setup/modification request/response/required消息等，或者是现有的其他F1 AP消息，或者是新消息，本申请对此不作任何限定。
需要说明的是，如果CU-CP决定更换的DU2尚没有为UE分配相关资源(即前文描述的场景一)，那么CU-CP还需要向DU2发起建立承载的相关流程，具体的：
CU-CP向DU2发送F1 AP消息UE context setup/modification request，向DU2请求建立待数传的相关承载，DU2收到消息后响应F1 AP UE context setup/modification response到CU-CP。
S904，该控制面节点向该第三网络节点发送数据，该第三网络节点接收该控制面节点发送的数据。
例如，CU-CP开始发送新的PDU数据或者重传的PDU数据到DU2，通过DU2发送至UE。
S905，当该第一网络节点的无线链路恢复时，该第一网络节点向该控制面节点发送第二通知消息。
例如，如果DU1发现无线链路恢复，则向CU-CP发送第二通知消息(radio link resume通知消息)，CU-CP接收DU1发送的该第二通知消息。
S906，控制面节点向该第一网络节点发送数据，该第一网络节点接收该控制面节点发送的数据。
例如，CU-CP决策恢复数传DU后，发送新的PDU或者重传的PDU通过DU1传输。
可选地，CU-CP决策恢复DU1的上下行数传。
下面结合图17介绍本申请实施例的传输方法1000，该传输方法1000主要针对在CP-UP的架构下，由于UE的移动导致UP改变的场景，即UE从源UP切换到目标UP的场景，此时源UP可能缓存有部分从核心网过来的数据，因此这时所述缓存的数据需要在切换过程中从源UP发送至目标UP，即UP之间需要通过建立用户面的通道从而来进行数据转发。本申请实施例主要针对以下几种场景：
场景一：UP改变的过程中CP没有改变
CP决策进行切换UP，并决策进行数据转发(如提前向源UP询问是否有缓存数据，或者源UP周期性上报缓存数据情况)，并向目标UP发送指示(显示的需要数据转发指示、或者隐式的切换状态指示)，指示目标UP分配数据转发地址(数据转发地址可以是PDU session粒度的和/或DRB粒度的，可以是上行/下行数据转发地址，本申请在此不限定)；
目标UP把分配数据转发地址通过CP发送给源UP；
源UP根据数据转发地址对缓存的数据进行数据转发。
场景二：UP改变的过程中CP改变
源CP决策进行切换UP，并决策进行数据转发(如提前向源UP询问是否有缓存数据，或者源UP周期性上报缓存数据情况)，并通过目标CP向目标UP发送指示(显示的需要数据转发指示、或者隐式的切换状态指示)，指示目标UP分配数据转发地址(数据转发地址可以是PDU session粒度的和/或DRB粒度的，可以是上行/下行数据转发地址，本发明不限定)；
目标UP把分配数据转发地址通过目标CP和源CP发送给源UP。
源UP根据数据转发地址对缓存的数据进行数据转发。
图17示出了根据本申请实施例的传输方法1000的示意性流程图，如图17所示，该方法1000包括：
S1001，控制面节点触发进行用户面节点的改变。
例如，CP触发进行UP的改变。具体的，控制面节点如何触发用户面节点改变属于实现，本申请在此不限定。
S1002，控制面节点向源用户面节点发送切换请求消息，源用户面节点接收该控制面节点发送的切换请求消息。
例如，CP向源UP发送切换请求消息，源UP接收CP发送的切换请求消息。
S1003，源用户面节点向该控制面节点发送的切换请求响应消息，控制面节点接收源用户面节点发送的切换请求响应消息。
例如，源UP向CP发送切换请求响应消息，CP接收源UP发送的切换请求响应消息。
具体而言，CP首先向源UP发起切换请求消息，该切换请求消息中携带数据状态的请求(如缓存数据状态)，源UP收到后响应CP，如果UP有缓存，则可以决定进行数据转发，则携带数据转发指示给CP。
应理解，S1002-S1003可选，CP向UP发起的切换请求可以是使用现有的E1 AP消息，消息名称不限定，如bearer modification/setup/release request/response/required/confirm消息，也可以是其他现有的E1 AP消息，或者是新消息，本申请对此不作任何限定。
需要说明的是，S1002与S1003两个步骤可以用一个步骤代替，即源用户面节点向控制面节点直接发送状态信息，所述状态信息如数据缓存信息，该控制面节点收到后认为可以触发进行数据转发。所述状态信息可以周期性或事件触发，本申请在此不限定。
S1004，控制面节点向目标用户面节点发送第六指示信息，该目标用户面节点接收该控制面节点发送的该第六指示信息。
例如，CP向目标UP发送第六指示信息，目标UP接收CP发送的该第六指示信息，该第六指示信息用于指示源UP要进行数据转发，即指示目标UP为源UP分配一个数据转发地址。
应理解，该第六指示信息可以携带在现有的E1 AP消息，如bearer modification/setup/release request/response/required/confirm消息，也可以是其他现有的E1AP消息，或者是新消息，本申请对此不作任何限定。
还应理解，该第六指示信息可以是显示的数据转发指示(如，data forwarding indication，可以是上行或者下行)，或者也可以是隐式的指示(如，HO status、HO等，即告诉目标 UP所述消息是UP切换触发的，不是UE初始接入触发的)，或者，也可以是携带特定PDU session或者DRB的信息隐式的来指示，或者也可以是携带特定PDU session或者DRB的数据转发指示(如，DRB ID1的data forwarding indication，PDU session 1的data forwarding indication，也即目标UP只为所述DRB或所述PDU session分配数据转发地址，源UP只转发所述DRB或所述PDU session的数据)。
S1005，目标用户面节点分配数据转发地址，并把所述数据转发地址发送给控制面节点。
例如，目标UP分配数据转发地址，并把所述数据转发地址发送给CP。
具体而言，所述数据转发地址可以是PDU session粒度的和/或DRB粒度的，可以是上行/下行数据转发地址，例如，DL/UL Forwarding GTP Tunnel Endpoint、PDU Session level DL data forwarding GTP-U Tunnel Endpoint，本申请对此不作任何限定。
S1006，控制面节点将该数据转发地址转发给源用户面节点。
例如，CP收到所述数据转发地址后，发送给源UP。
应理解，所述数据转发地址可以携带在现有的E1 AP消息中，如bearer modification/setup/release request/response/required/confirm消息，也可以是其他现有的E1AP消息，或者是新消息，本申请对此不作任何限定。
应理解，该方法1000还包括CU和DU之间通过F1AP消息进行承载的修改；CP与目标UP、CP与源UP之间进行SN(sequence number序列号)转移流程执行；数据转发在源UP和目标UP之间执行；CP与核心网进行路径更新流程，这些流程与现有流程类似，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
可选的，对于场景二，即CP改变的情况下，目标CP在接收到目标UP发送的数据转发地址后，可以将该数据转发地址发送给源CP，由源CP将该数据转发地址发送给该源UP。具体的，目标CP通过与源CP之间的接口发送所述数据转发地址，例如Xn接口，X2接口或者其他现有或者新的接口，本申请此处不限定。需要说明的是，目标CP指示目标UP分配数据转发地址，其中，所述目标CP的数据转发指示可以是自己触发的，也可以是由源CP触发的，即源CP触发进行数据转发之后，源CP发送所述数据转发指示给目标CP(例如，通过Xn接口或者X2接口指示)，由目标CP指示目标UP分配数据转发地址，其中，目标UP分配数据转发地址的方法同场景一类似，此处不再赘述。所述数据转发地址同场景一类似，此处不再赘述。
上文结合图1至图17，详细得描述了根据本申请实施例的传输方法，下面结合图18至图29，详细得描述根据本申请实施例的网络设备和终端设备。
图18示出了根据本申请实施例的网络设备1100的示意性框图，如图18所示，该网络设备1100包括：
处理模块1110，用于控制收发模块1120接收来自于第二网络节点的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域；
该收发模块1120还用于向终端设备发送该至少一个系统信息和该第一指示信息，以便于该终端设备获知该至少一个系统信息所应用的有效区域。
可选地，该收发模块还用于接收来自于该第二网络节点的第一配置信息，该第一配置信息包括至少一个系统信息块、该至少一个系统信息块的调度信息、该至少一个系统信息 和该至少一个系统信息块的映射关系、该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的调度周期中的至少一种。
可选地，该处理模块1110还用于确定第二配置信息，该第二配置信息用于该第一网络节点发送该至少一个系统信息所使用，该第二配置信息包括至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的窗口长度、该至少一个系统信息块的调度信息、该至少一个系统信息和至少一个系统信息块的映射关系、该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的调度周期中的至少一种。
可选地，该至少一个系统信息块的调度信息包括至少一个系统信息块中每个系统信息块的调度周期，该至少一个系统信息块中每个系统信息块的警示区域列表和该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息块的广播次数中的至少一种。
可选地，该收发模块还用于接收来自于该第二网络节点的封闭用户群CSG指示信息和CSG标识信息，该CSG指示信息用于指示该终端设备所处小区是CSG小区，或者，该CSG指示信息用于指示该终端设备所处小区不是CSG小区。
可选地，该网络设备包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或
该第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
图19示出根据本申请实施例的网络设备1200的示意性框图，如图19所示，该网络设备1200包括：
处理模块1210，用于确定至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域；
收发模块1220，用于向第一网络节点发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域。
可选地，该收发模块1220还用于向该第一网络节点发送第一配置信息，该第一配置信息包括至少一个系统信息块、该至少一个系统信息块的调度信息、该至少一个系统信息和至少一个系统信息块的映射关系、该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的调度周期中的至少一种。
可选地，该至少一个系统信息块的调度信息包括至少一个系统信息块中每个系统信息块的调度周期，该至少一个系统信息块中每个系统信息块的警示区域列表和该至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息块的广播次数中的至少一种。
可选地，该处理模块1210还用于确定CSG指示信息和CSG标识信息，该CSG指示信息用于指示该终端设备所处小区是CSG小区，或者，该CSG指示信息用于指示该终端设备所处小区不是CSG小区；
该收发模块1220还用于向该第一网络节点发送该CSG指示信息和该CSG标识信息。
可选地，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或
该第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
图20示出根据本申请实施例的终端设备1300的示意性框图，如图20所示，该终端设备1300包括：
收发模块1310，接收来自于第一网络节点的至少一个系统信息和第一指示信息，该 第一指示信息用于指示至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域；
处理模块1320，用于根据该第一指示信息，确定该至少一个系统信息所应用的有效区域。
可选地，该收发模块1310还用于接收来自于该第一网络节点的封闭用户群CSG指示信息和CSG标识信息，该CSG指示信息用于指示该终端设备所处小区是CSG小区，或者，该CSG指示信息用于指示该终端设备所处小区不是CSG小区。
可选地，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种。
图21示出根据本申请实施例的网络设备1400的示意性框图，如图21所示，该网络设备1400包括：
处理模块1410，用于确定终端设备使用第一消息请求系统信息或系统信息块，该第一消息为随机接入第一消息或者随机接入第三消息，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；
收发模块1420，用于向该终端设备发送第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示该终端设备使用该第一消息请求系统信息或系统信息块。
可选地，该第一消息为随机接入第一消息，该第三指示信息还用于指示至少一个系统信息和随机接入前导序列的映射关系。
可选地，该第一消息为随机接入第三消息，该收发模块1120还用于接收来自于所述第二网络节点的系统信息请求响应信息和冲突解决标识信息中的至少一种。
可选地，该第一消息为随机接入第三消息，该收发模块1120还用于接收来自于所述第二网络节点的bitmap指示信息，所述bitmap指示信息用于指示发送给终端设备的系统信息或者系统信息块；
该收发模块1420还用于向该终端设备发送MAC CE，该MAC CE包括该bitmap指示信息；
或者，该收发模块1420转发该第二网络节点发送的bitmap指示信息给该终端设备，该bitmap指示信息用于指示发送给该终端设备的系统信息或者系统信息块。
图22示出根据本申请实施例的网络设备1500的示意性框图，如图22所示，该网络设备1500包括：
处理模块1510，用于确定终端设备使用第一消息请求系统信息或系统信息块，该第一消息为随机接入第一消息或者随机接入第三消息；
收发模块1520，用于向第一网络节点发送第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示该第一网络节点向该终端设备发送第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备使用该第一消息请求系统信息或系统信息块；
其中，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或
该第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
可选地，该第一消息为随机接入第一消息，该第三指示信息还用于指示至少一个系统信息和随机接入前导序列的映射关系。
可选地，该第一消息为随机接入第一消息，该第四指示信息还用于指示至少一个系统信息和随机接入前导序列的映射关系。
可选地，该第一消息为随机接入第三消息，该第三指示信息还用于该第一网络节点向该终端设备指示使用该随机接入第三消息请求系统信息，或者，该第三指示信息用于该第一网络节点向该终端设备指示使用该随机接入第三消息请求系统信息块。
可选地，该第一消息为随机接入第三消息，该收发模块1520还用于向该第一网络节点发送系统信息请求响应，该系统信息请求响应中包括系统信息请求响应信息和冲突解决标识信息中的至少一种；
或者，该收发模块1520还用于通过该第一网络节点向该终端设备发送系统信息请求响应，该系统信息请求响应中包括系统信息请求响应信息和冲突解决标识信息中的至少一种。
可选地，该第一消息为随机接入第三消息，该收发模块1520还用于向该第一网络节点发送bitmap指示信息，该bitmap指示信息用于指示发送给终端设备的系统信息；
或者，该收发模块1520还用于通过该第一网络节点向该终端设备发送bitmap指示信息，该bitmap指示信息用于指示发送给该终端设备的系统信息或系统信息块。
图23示出根据本申请实施例的网络设备1600的示意性框图，如图23所示，该网络设备1600包括：
处理模块1610，用于生成资源状态信息，该资源状态信息包括物理资源块、硬件负载和几乎空白子帧中的至少一种；
收发模块1620，用于向第二网络节点发送该资源状态信息；
其中，该网络设备包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或
该第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
可选地，该收发模块1620还用于接收第二网络节点发送的资源状态请求消息，该资源状态请求消息用于请求该资源状态信息。
可选地，该收发模块1620还用于接收来自于该第二网络节点的第三网络节点的该资源状态信息。
图24示出根据本申请实施例的网络设备1700的示意性框图，如图24所示，该网络设备1700包括：
收发模块1710，接收来自于第一网络节点的第一资源状态信息，该第一资源状态信息包括物理资源块、硬件负载和几乎空白子帧中的至少一种；
处理模块1720，用于控制收发模块1710向第三网络节点发送第二资源状态信息，该第二资源状态信息包括物理资源块、硬件负载、几乎空白子帧、传输网络层负载、可用容量、参考信号接收功率测量报告、信道状态信息报告中的至少一种；
其中，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或
该第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
可选地，该收发模块1710还用于接收该第三网络节点发送的第二资源状态请求信息，该第二资源请求信息用于请求该第二资源状态信息；
该收发模块1710还用于向该第一网络节点发送第一资源状态请求信息，该第二资源状态请求信息用于请求该第一资源状态信息；
该收发模块1710还用于接收来自于该第一网络节点的测量结果，该测量结果包括物理资源块、硬件负载和几乎空白子帧中的至少一种。
可选地，该收发模块1710还用于：
接收该第三网络节点发送的该第二资源状态信息；
向该第一网络节点发送该第一资源状态信息。
图25示出根据本申请实施例的网络设备1800的示意性框图，如图25所示，该网络设备1800包括：
处理模块1810，用于生成第二消息，该第二消息中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备请求系统信息，或者，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备请求建立RRC连接；
或者，该处理模块1810用于生成第二消息，该第二消息承载在第一逻辑信道或者第二逻辑信道，该第一逻辑信道用于承载请求系统信息的消息，该第二逻辑信道用于承载请求RRC连接的消息；
或者，该处理模块1810用于生成第二消息，该第二消息使用第一逻辑信道标识或者第二逻辑信道标识，该第一逻辑信道标识用于识别请求系统信息的消息，该第二逻辑信道标识用于识别请求RRC连接的消息；
收发模块1820，用于向第一网络节点发送该第二消息，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种。
可选地，该第四指示信息包括在第四消息的消息报头中，该消息报头可以是MAC层报头或RLC层报头；或者
该第四指示信息为消息类型信息；
图26示出根据本申请实施例的网络设备1900的示意性框图，如图26所示，该网络设备1900包括：
收发模块1910接收来自于终端设备的第二消息，该第二消息包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备请求系统信息或者系统信息块，或者，该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备请求建立RRC连接，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；
或者，该收发模块1910用于在第一逻辑信道或者第二逻辑信道上接收第二消息，该第一逻辑信道上承载的消息用于请求系统信息，该第二逻辑信道承载的消息用于请求建立RRC连接；
或者，该收发模块1910用于接收来自于终端设备的第二消息，该第二消息使用的是第一逻辑信道标识，或者，该第二消息使用的是第二逻辑信道标识；
处理模块1920，用于生成第三消息，该第三消息包括该第二消息的第一容器，该第一容器的消息类型信息指示该终端设备需要请求的系统信息；
该收发模块1910还用于向第二网络节点发送第三消息，该第三消息包括第一容器， 该第一容器中的信息指示该终端设备需要请求的系统信息或者系统信息块，该第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
图27示出根据本申请实施例的网络设备2000的示意性框图，如图27所示，该网络设备2000包括：
收发模块2010，用于接收来自于第一网络节点的第三消息，该第三消息用于请求建立RRC连接，该第三消息的目的是根据该第三消息中的第一容器的信息确定的；
处理模块2020，用于确定该第一容器中的信息指示该终端设备需要建立RRC连接；
该处理模块2020还用于确定该第三消息不包括第二容器，该第二容器为该第一网络节点到该第二网络节点的RRC容器；
该收发模块2010还用于通过该第一网络节点向终端设备发送拒绝指示信息，该拒绝指示信息用于指示拒绝该终端设备建立RRC连接。
可选地，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或
该网络设备2000包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
图28示出了根据本申请实施例的网络设备2100的示意性框图，如图28所示，该网络设备2100包括：
收发模块2110，用于接收来自于第一网络节点的第三消息，该第三消息用于请求系统信息或者系统信息块，该第三消息的目的是根据该第三消息中的第一容器的信息确定的；
处理模块2120，用于确定该第一容器的信息指示该终端设备需要请求的系统信息或者系统信息块；
该收发模块2110还用于通过该第一网络节点向该终端设备发送系统信息请求响应信息或者bitmap指示信息，该bitmap指示信息用于指示发送给该终端设备的系统信息或者系统信息块。
可选地，该第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或
该网络设备包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
可以理解的是，对于前述实施例中所涉及的终端设备、第一网络节点和第二网络节点，或者，前述实施例中涉及的UE、DU(例如，eNB-DU或者gNB-DU)和CU(例如，eNB-CU或者gNB-CU)，可以通过具有处理器和通信接口的硬件平台执行程序指令来分别实现其在本申请前述实施例中任一设计中涉及的功能，基于此，如图29所示，本申请实施例提供了一种通信设备2200的示意性框图，所述通信设备2200包括：
至少一个处理器2201，可选包括通信接口2202，该通信接口用于支持该通信设备2200和其他设备进行通信交互；当程序指令在所述至少一个处理器2201中执行时，本申请前述实施例任一设计中在如下任一设备上操作的功能得以实现：终端设备、第一网络节点和第二网络节点，或者，UE、DU(例如，eNB-DU或者gNB-DU)和CU(例如，eNB-CU或者gNB-CU)。一种可选设计中，该通信设备2200还可以包含存储器2203，以存储实 现上述设备功能所必须的程序指令或者程序执行过程中所产生的过程数据。可选的，该通信设备2200还可以包含内部的互联线路，以实现该至少一个处理器2201，通信接口2202以及存储器2203之间的通信交互。该至少一个处理器2201可以考虑通过专用处理芯片、处理电路、处理器或者通用芯片实现。
本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片系统，应用于网络设备中，该芯片系统包括：至少一个处理器、至少一个存储器和接口电路，所述接口电路负责所述芯片系统与外界的信息交互，所述至少一个存储器、所述接口电路和所述至少一个处理器通过线路互联，所述至少一个存储器中存储有指令；所述指令被所述至少一个处理器执行，以进行上述各个方面的所述的方法中所述第一网络节点或者第二网络节点的操作。
本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片系统，应用于终端设备中，该芯片系统包括：至少一个处理器、至少一个存储器和接口电路，所述接口电路负责所述芯片系统与外界的信息交互，所述至少一个存储器、所述接口电路和所述至少一个处理器通过线路互联，所述至少一个存储器中存储有指令；所述指令被所述至少一个处理器执行，以进行上述各个方面的所述的方法中所述终端设备的操作。
本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统，包括：网络设备，和/或，终端设备；其中，所述网络设备为上述各个方面所述的网络设备。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品，应用于网络设备中，所述计算机程序产品包括一系列指令，当所述指令被运行时，以进行上述各个方面的所述的方法中所述第一网络节点或者第二网络节点的操作。
在本申请实施例中，应注意，本申请实施例上述的方法实施例可以应用于处理器中，或者由处理器实现。处理器可能是一种集成电路芯片，具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中，上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit，ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成，或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器，处理器读取存储器中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
可以理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(Read-Only Memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的RAM可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机 存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(Synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM，DR RAM)。应注意，本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
应理解，说明书通篇中提到的“一个实施例”或“一实施例”意味着与实施例有关的特定特征、结构或特性包括在本申请的至少一个实施例中。因此，在整个说明书各处出现的“在一个实施例中”或“在一实施例中”未必一定指相同的实施例。此外，这些特定的特征、结构或特性可以任意适合的方式结合在一个或多个实施例中。应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
另外，本文中术语“系统”和“网络”在本文中常被可互换使用。本文中术语“和/或”，仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。另外，本文中字符“/”，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
应理解，在本申请实施例中，“与A相应的B”表示B与A相关联，根据A可以确定B。但还应理解，根据A确定B并不意味着仅仅根据A确定B，还可以根据A和/或其它信息确定B。
上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品可以包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁盘)、光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘Solid State Disk(SSD))等。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组 件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器、随机存取存储器、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应所述以权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (43)

  1. 一种传输方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一网络节点接收来自于第二网络节点的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域；
    所述第一网络节点向终端设备发送所述至少一个系统信息和所述第一指示信息，以便于所述终端设备获知所述至少一个系统信息所应用的有效区域。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一网络节点接收来自于所述第二网络节点的第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息包括至少一个系统信息块、所述至少一个系统信息块的调度信息、所述至少一个系统信息和所述至少一个系统信息块的映射关系、所述至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的调度周期中的至少一种。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一网络节点确定第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息用于所述第一网络节点发送所述至少一个系统信息所使用，所述第二配置信息包括至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的窗口长度、所述至少一个系统信息块的调度信息、所述至少一个系统信息和至少一个系统信息块的映射关系、所述至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的调度周期中的至少一种。
  4. 根据权利要求2或3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述至少一个系统信息块的调度信息包括至少一个系统信息块中每个系统信息块的调度周期，所述至少一个系统信息块中每个系统信息块的警示区域列表和所述至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息块的广播次数中的至少一种。
  5. 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述有效区域指示区域级别时，所述第一指示信息包括区域标识area ID，或者，所述有效区域指示小区级别和区域级别时，所述第一指示信息包括area ID和位图信息bitmap。
  6. 根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或
    所述第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
  7. 一种网络设备，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储指令；
    处理器，用于调用所述存储器中的指令，以进行根据权利要求1至6中任一项的方法的操作。
  8. 一种传输方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第二网络节点确定至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域；
    所述第二网络节点向第一网络节点发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的有效区域。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二网络节点向所述第一网络节点发送第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息包括至 少一个系统信息块、所述至少一个系统信息块的调度信息、所述至少一个系统信息和至少一个系统信息块的映射关系、所述至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息的调度周期中的至少一种。
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述至少一个系统信息块的调度信息包括至少一个系统信息块中每个系统信息块的调度周期，所述至少一个系统信息块中每个系统信息块的警示区域列表和所述至少一个系统信息中每个系统信息块的广播次数中的至少一种。
  11. 根据权利要求8至10中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或
    所述第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
  12. 一种网络设备，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储指令；
    处理器，用于调用所述存储器中的指令，以进行根据权利要求8至11中任一项的方法的操作。
  13. 一种传输方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一网络节点确定终端设备使用第一消息请求系统信息或系统信息块，所述第一消息为随机接入第一消息或者随机接入第三消息，所述第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；
    所述第一网络节点向所述终端设备发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述终端设备使用所述第一消息请求系统信息或系统信息块。
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一消息为随机接入第一消息，所述第三指示信息还用于指示至少一个系统信息和随机接入前导序列的映射关系。
  15. 根据权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一消息为随机接入第三消息，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一网络节点接收来自于所述第二网络节点的系统信息请求响应信息和冲突解决标识信息中的至少一种。
  16. 根据权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一消息为随机接入第三消息，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一网络节点接收来自于所述第二网络节点的bitmap指示信息，所述bitmap指示信息用于指示发送给终端设备的系统信息或者系统信息块；
    所述第一网络节点向所述终端设备发送媒体接入控制层控制元素MAC CE，所述MAC CE包括所述bitmap指示信息；
    或者，所述第一网络节点转发第二网络节点发送的bitmap指示信息给所述终端设备，所述bitmap指示信息用于指示发送给所述终端设备的系统信息或者系统信息块。
  17. 一种网络设备，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储指令；
    处理器，用于调用所述存储器中的指令，以进行根据权利要求13至16中任一项的方法的操作。
  18. 一种传输方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一网络节点向第二网络节点发送资源状态信息，所述资源状态信息包括物理资源块、硬件负载和几乎空白子帧中的至少一种；
    其中，所述第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或
    所述第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，第一网络节点向第二网络节点发送资源状态信息之前，所述方法还包括：
    第一网络节点接收第二网络节点发送的资源状态请求消息，所述资源状态请求消息用于请求所述资源状态信息。
  20. 根据权利要求18或19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一网络节点接收来自于所述第二网络节点的第三网络节点的所述资源状态信息。
  21. 一种网络设备，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储指令；
    处理器，用于调用所述存储器中的指令，以进行根据权利要求18至20中任一项的方法的操作。
  22. 一种传输方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第二网络节点接收来自于第一网络节点的第一资源状态信息，所述第一资源状态信息包括物理资源块、硬件负载和几乎空白子帧中的至少一种；
    所述第二网络节点向第三网络节点发送第二资源状态信息，所述第二资源状态信息包括物理资源块、硬件负载、几乎空白子帧、传输网络层负载、可用容量、参考信号接收功率测量报告、信道状态信息报告中的至少一种；
    其中，所述第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；和/或
    所述第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二网络节点接收来自于第一网络节点的第一资源状态信息之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二网络节点接收所述第三网络节点发送的第二资源状态请求信息，所述第二资源请求信息用于请求所述第二资源状态信息；
    所述第二网络节点向所述第一网络节点发送第一资源状态请求信息，所述第二资源状态请求信息用于请求所述第一资源状态信息；
    所述第二网络节点接收来自于所述第一网络节点的测量结果，所述测量结果包括物理资源块、硬件负载和几乎空白子帧中的至少一种。
  24. 根据权利要求22或23所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二网络节点接收所述第三网络节点发送的所述第二资源状态信息；
    所述第二网络节点向所述第一网络节点发送所述第一资源状态信息。
  25. 一种网络设备，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储指令；
    处理器，用于调用所述存储器中的指令，以进行根据权利要求22至24中任一项的方法的操作。
  26. 一种传输方法，其特征在于，包括：
    终端设备生成第二消息，所述第二消息中包括第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述终端设备请求系统信息或者系统信息块，或者，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述终端设备请求建立RRC连接；
    或者，终端设备生成第二消息，所述第二消息承载在第一逻辑信道或者第二逻辑信道，所述第一逻辑信道用于承载请求系统信息或者系统信息块的消息，所述第二逻辑信道用于承载请求RRC连接的消息；
    或者，终端设备生成第二消息，所述第二消息使用第一逻辑信道标识或者第二逻辑信道标识，所述第一逻辑信道标识用于识别请求系统信息的消息，所述第二逻辑信道标识用于识别请求RRC连接的消息；
    所述终端设备向第一网络节点发送所述第二消息，所述第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种。
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第四指示信息包括在第四消息的消息报头中，所述消息报头可以是媒体接入控制MAC层报头或无线链路层控制协议RLC层报头；或者
    所述第四指示信息为消息类型信息。
  28. 一种终端设备，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储指令；
    处理器，用于调用所述存储器中的指令，以进行根据权利要求26或27的方法的操作。
  29. 一种传输方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一网络节点接收来自于终端设备的第二消息，所述第二消息包括第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述终端设备请求系统信息或者系统信息块，或者，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述终端设备请求建立RRC连接，所述第一网络节点包括无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种；
    或者，第一网络节点在第一逻辑信道或者第二逻辑信道上接收第二消息，所述第一逻辑信道上承载的消息用于请求系统信息，所述第二逻辑信道承载的消息用于请求建立RRC连接；
    或者，第一网络节点接收来自于终端设备的第二消息，所述第二消息使用的是第一逻辑信道标识，或者，所述第二消息使用的是第二逻辑信道标识；
    所述第一网络节点向第二网络节点发送第三消息，所述第三消息包括所述第二消息的第一容器，所述第一容器的信息指示所述终端设备需要请求的系统信息或者系统信息块，所述第二网络节点包括无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
  30. 一种网络设备，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储指令；
    处理器，用于调用所述存储器中的指令，以进行根据权利要求29的方法的操作。
  31. 一种传输方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第二网络节点接收来自于第一网络节点的第三消息，所述第三消息用于请求建立RRC连接，所述第三消息的目的是根据所述第三消息的第一容器的信息确定的；
    所述第二网络节点确定所述第三消息不包括第二容器，所述第二容器为所述第一网络节点到所述第二网络节点的RRC容器；
    所述第二网络节点通过所述第一网络节点向终端设备发送拒绝指示信息，所述拒绝指示信息用于指示不允许所述终端设备建立RRC连接。
  32. 一种网络设备，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储指令；
    处理器，用于调用所述存储器中的指令，以进行根据权利要求31的方法的操作
  33. 一种传输方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第二网络节点接收来自于第一网络节点的第三消息，所述第三消息用于请求系统信息或者系统信息块，所述第三消息的目的是根据所述第三消息的第一容器的信息确定的；
    所述第二网络节点通过所述第一网络节点向终端设备发送系统信息请求响应信息或者bitmap指示信息，所述bitmap指示信息用于指示发送给所述终端设备的系统信息或者系统信息块。
  34. 一种网络设备，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储指令；
    处理器，用于调用所述存储器中的指令，以进行根据权利要求33的方法的操作。
  35. 一种传输方法，其特征在于，包括：
    控制面节点接收用户面节点发送第五指示信息，所述第五指示信息用于指示第一网络节点的无线链路故障；
    所述控制面节点根据所述第五指示信息，确定是否切换所述第一网络节点；其中，
    所述控制面节点的协议栈架构为无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种；和/或
    所述第一网络节点的协议栈架构为无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种。
  36. 一种网络设备，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储指令；
    处理器，用于调用所述存储器中的指令，以进行根据权利要求35的方法的操作。
  37. 一种传输方法，其特征在于，包括：
    用户面节点向控制面节点发送第五指示信息，所述第五指示信息用于指示第一网络节点的无线链路故障；其中
    所述用户面节点的协议栈架构为无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种；和/或
    所述第一网络节点的协议栈架构为无线链路层控制协议层、媒体接入控制层和物理层功能中的至少一种。
  38. 根据权利要求37所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述用户面节点接收所述第一网络节点发送的用户面接口消息，所述用户面接口消息用于指示所述第一网络节点的无线链路故障。
  39. 一种网络设备，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储指令；
    处理器，用于调用所述存储器中的指令，以进行根据权利要求37或38的方法的操作。
  40. 一种传输方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一控制面节点向第一用户面节点发送第六指示信息，所述第六指示信息用于触发分配第一承载的数据转发地址；
    所述第一控制面节点接收所述第一用户面节点发送的所述数据转发地址；其中，
    所述第一控制面节点的协议栈架构为无线资源控制协议层、业务数据适配层和分组数据汇聚协议层中的至少一种。
  41. 根据权利要求40所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一控制面节点向第二用户面节点发送的所述数据转发地址。
  42. 根据权利要求40所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一控制面节点通过第二控制面节点，向第二用户面节点发送所述数据转发地址。
  43. 一种网络设备，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储指令；
    处理器，用于调用所述存储器中的指令，以进行根据权利要求40至42中任一项的方法的操作。
PCT/CN2019/071060 2018-01-12 2019-01-10 一种传输方法和网络设备 WO2019137406A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201810032038.5 2018-01-12
CN201810032038 2018-01-12
CN201810296172.6A CN110035472A (zh) 2018-01-12 2018-04-04 一种传输方法和网络设备
CN201810296172.6 2018-04-04

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019137406A1 true WO2019137406A1 (zh) 2019-07-18

Family

ID=67218879

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/071060 WO2019137406A1 (zh) 2018-01-12 2019-01-10 一种传输方法和网络设备

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2019137406A1 (zh)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021218301A1 (zh) * 2020-04-27 2021-11-04 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 一种多小区mbms业务传输的方法、装置及存储介质
WO2021239109A1 (en) * 2020-05-29 2021-12-02 FG Innovation Company Limited Management of system information block segmentation
US20220132626A1 (en) * 2019-01-18 2022-04-28 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for access control in wireless communication system
WO2022151412A1 (zh) * 2021-01-15 2022-07-21 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及其通信装置

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009090848A1 (en) * 2008-01-16 2009-07-23 Nec Corporation Method for controlling access to a mobile communications network
CN101815358A (zh) * 2009-02-24 2010-08-25 鼎桥通信技术有限公司 一种用户设备之间的数据传输方法
CN102469512A (zh) * 2010-11-04 2012-05-23 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 一种接入过程的处理方法及装置
CN102685785A (zh) * 2011-03-18 2012-09-19 华为技术有限公司 无线资源控制rrc连接重建立的方法和设备
CN103929774A (zh) * 2013-01-16 2014-07-16 华为技术有限公司 资源状态交互方法、网络设备及网络系统
CN104170278A (zh) * 2012-03-13 2014-11-26 中兴通讯(美国)公司 异构网络中的干扰管理
CN107006002A (zh) * 2015-04-10 2017-08-01 松下电器（美国）知识产权公司 机器类型通信中的系统信息调度
CN107135502A (zh) * 2017-05-04 2017-09-05 电信科学技术研究院 一种系统信息的发送方法及装置

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009090848A1 (en) * 2008-01-16 2009-07-23 Nec Corporation Method for controlling access to a mobile communications network
CN101815358A (zh) * 2009-02-24 2010-08-25 鼎桥通信技术有限公司 一种用户设备之间的数据传输方法
CN102469512A (zh) * 2010-11-04 2012-05-23 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 一种接入过程的处理方法及装置
CN102685785A (zh) * 2011-03-18 2012-09-19 华为技术有限公司 无线资源控制rrc连接重建立的方法和设备
CN104170278A (zh) * 2012-03-13 2014-11-26 中兴通讯(美国)公司 异构网络中的干扰管理
CN103929774A (zh) * 2013-01-16 2014-07-16 华为技术有限公司 资源状态交互方法、网络设备及网络系统
CN107006002A (zh) * 2015-04-10 2017-08-01 松下电器（美国）知识产权公司 机器类型通信中的系统信息调度
CN107135502A (zh) * 2017-05-04 2017-09-05 电信科学技术研究院 一种系统信息的发送方法及装置

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20220132626A1 (en) * 2019-01-18 2022-04-28 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for access control in wireless communication system
US11877341B2 (en) * 2019-01-18 2024-01-16 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for access control in wireless communication system
WO2021218301A1 (zh) * 2020-04-27 2021-11-04 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 一种多小区mbms业务传输的方法、装置及存储介质
WO2021239109A1 (en) * 2020-05-29 2021-12-02 FG Innovation Company Limited Management of system information block segmentation
US11671901B2 (en) 2020-05-29 2023-06-06 FG Innovation Company Limited Management of system information block segmentation
WO2022151412A1 (zh) * 2021-01-15 2022-07-21 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及其通信装置

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11706829B2 (en) Method for data forwarding in a small cell system
EP3509371B1 (en) Method and device for transmitting message
US20230180274A1 (en) Data scheduling method, base station, and system
US11224079B2 (en) Method and apparatus for operating wireless communication system having separated mobility management and session management
EP3435729B1 (en) Method for changing connection mode in base station, and base station thereof, and method for changing connection mode in user equipment, and user equipment thereof
US11064557B2 (en) Method and device for establishing radio resource control connection
EP2947951B1 (en) Double-connection implementation method and base station
WO2019137406A1 (zh) 一种传输方法和网络设备
RU2679537C2 (ru) Способ, устройство и система обработки сообщения управления радиоресурсами rrc
WO2017024909A1 (zh) 一种进行数据传输的方法和设备
GB2575033A (en) Communication system
EP3506677B1 (en) Method and device for establishing bearer
EP3226648A1 (en) Method, device, and system for transmitting data packet
JP2023533422A (ja) デュアルコネクティビティ下でのサイドリンクリレー通信のための方法
WO2021226967A1 (zh) 切换的方法和设备
KR102153135B1 (ko) 무선 통신 시스템에서 베어러를 설정하기 위한 장치 및 이를 위한 방법
JP2022502979A (ja) パラメータ設定方法、端末装置及び記憶媒体
WO2022198597A1 (zh) 小区重选场景下的数据传输方法、装置、设备及存储介质
US20240188152A1 (en) Systems and methods for establishing shared n3 tunnel
WO2023237046A1 (zh) 一种iab节点的移动性管理方法及相关设备
WO2023035187A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法及设备
KR102237265B1 (ko) 패킷 처리 장치 및 방법
CN116471549A (zh) 一种数据传输的方法、装置以及系统

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19738077

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19738077

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1